VW Sharan 2011 Electrical System Eng

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 289

Service

Workshop Manual
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system
Edition 11.2018

Service Department. Technical Information


Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups

Repair Group
27 - Starter, current supply, CCS
90 - Gauges, instruments
92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system
94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior
96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior
97 - Wiring

Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Contents

27 - Starter, current supply, CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1


1 Battery A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Fundamentals for batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Types of battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Warning notices and safety regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.4 Battery terminal connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Checking battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 Charging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 Disconnecting and connecting battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.1 Assembly overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.2 Disconnecting battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.3 Connecting battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5 Removing and installing battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.1 Assembly overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.2 Removing and installing battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.3 Battery parameterisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6 Starter, vehicles with manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
6.1 Checking starter B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
6.2 Starter, vehicles with 1.4l, 110 KW TSI engine and manual gearbox MQ200-6F . . . . . . . . 11
6.3 Starter, vehicles with 2.0 l 103 KW TDI engine and manual gearbox MQ350-6F . . . . . . . . 14
7 Starter, vehicles with dual clutch gearbox (DSG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.1 Starter, vehicles with 2.0 l 103 kW TDI engine and dual clutch gearbox DQ250-6F . . . . . . 19
8 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.1 Securing B+ (battery positive) wire to alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.2 Checking poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.3 Checking alternator C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
8.4 Alternator, 1.4 l, 110 KW TSI engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
8.5 Alternator, 2.0 l, 103 KW TDI engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
8.6 Removing and installing poly V-belt pulley on alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.7 Voltage regulator for alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
9 Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
10 Start/stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
10.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
10.2 Start/stop operation switch E693 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
10.3 Voltage stabiliser J532 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

90 - Gauges, instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1 Dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.2 Renewing dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.3 Removing and installing dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.4 Description of back of dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.5 Pin assignment of connectors on dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2 Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1 Resetting service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49


1 windscreen wiper system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.2 Deactivating APP function of wiper motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.3 Assembly overview - windscreen wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Contents i
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1.4 Removing and installing windscreen wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51


1.5 Removing and installing wiper arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.6 Adjusting wiper blade park position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.7 Removing and installing joint-free wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.8 Removing and installing rain and light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2 Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.1 Assembly overview - windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.2 Removing and installing washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.3 Removing and installing windscreen and rear window washer pump V59 . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.4 Removing and installing windscreen washer fluid level sender G33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.5 Removing and installing windscreen washer system spray jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.6 Adjusting windscreen washer system spray jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3 Rear window wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.1 Assembly overview - rear window wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.2 Removing and installing wiper arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.3 Removing and installing rear window wiper motor V12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.4 Adjusting rear window wiper park position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.5 Removing and installing joint-free wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4 Rear window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.1 Assembly overview - rear window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.2 Renewing and setting spray jet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5 Headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.2 Assembly overview - headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.3 Removing and installing headlight washer system pump V11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.4 Removing and installing spray jet pop-up cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.5 Removing and installing spray jet retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.6 Adjusting headlight washer system spray jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.7 Bleeding headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6 Washer fluid line hose couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7 Hose repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83


1 Operation and safety notes for gas discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2 Headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2.2 Assembly overview - headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights . . . . . . . . 87
2.3 Removing and installing headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.4 Adjusting headlight installation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.5 Renewing gas discharge bulbs and cornering light bulbs in headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.6 Headlight range control motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.7 Headlight holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.8 Dynamic cornering light control motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.9 Swivel module position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.10 Power output module for headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.11 Gas discharge bulb control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2.12 Cornering light and headlight range control unit J745 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.13 Vehicle level sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.14 Repairing headlight retaining tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.15 Converting headlights for use when driving on the left or right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.16 Adjusting headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3 Headlight with halogen bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.2 Assembly overview - headlights with halogen bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

ii Contents
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.3 Removing and installing headlights with halogen bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102


3.4 Adjusting headlight installation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.5 Renewing headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.6 Headlight range control motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.7 Repairing headlight retaining tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.8 Converting headlights for use when driving on the left or right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.9 Adjusting headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4.1 Assembly overview - fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4.2 Removing and installing fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4.3 Removing and installing fog light / static cornering light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4.4 Adjusting fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5 Turn signal repeater and entry light in exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.2 Turn signal repeater bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.3 Entry light in exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6 Tail light clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.1 Assembly overview - tail light cluster in side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.2 Removing and installing tail light cluster in side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.3 Removing and installing tail light bulb cluster carrier in side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.4 Renewing brake and tail light cluster and turn signal bulbs in tail light cluster in side panel
........................................................................ 129
6.5 Assembly overview - tail light cluster in rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.6 Removing and installing tail light cluster in rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.7 Removing and installing tail light cluster bulb carrier in rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.8 Renewing brake and tail light bulbs in rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7 Number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.1 Clipped number plate light X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
8 High-level brake lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8.1 High-level brake light bulb M25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
9 Steering column switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.2 Assembly overview - steering column switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.3 Removal and installation sequence of components of steering column switch . . . . . . . . . . 139
9.4 Steering column electronics control unit J527 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
9.5 Steering column combination switch E595 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.6 Steering column switch carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
10 Steering column switch, vehicles with KESSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.2 Assembly overview - steering column switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.3 Removal and installation sequence of components of steering column switch . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.4 Steering column electronics control unit J527 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.5 Steering column combination switch E595 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
10.6 Steering column switch carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
10.7 Control unit for electronic steering column lock J764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
11 Ignition/starter switch and lock cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
11.1 Removing and installing steering lock housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
11.2 Removing and installing lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
11.3 Removing and installing ignition/starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
11.4 Removing and installing ignition/starter switch, vehicles with KESSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
11.5 Removing and installing ignition key withdrawal lock solenoid N376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
12 Entry and start authorisation (KESSY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
12.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
12.2 Assembly overview - entry and start authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Contents iii
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

12.3 Entry and start authorisation control unit J518 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169


12.4 Entry and start authorisation aerials and sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
12.5 Removing and installing rear lid power opening sender G750 / G760 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
12.6 Starter button E378 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
13 Parking aid (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
13.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
13.2 Assembly overview - parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
13.3 Park assist steering control unit J791 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
13.4 Front parking aid senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
13.5 Rear parking aid senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
13.6 Renewing parking aid senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
13.7 Parking aid loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
13.8 Parking aid button E266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
14 Park assist steering (PAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
14.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
14.2 Assembly overview of park assist steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
14.3 Park assist steering control unit J791 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
14.4 Park assist steering senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
14.5 Renewing park assist steering senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
14.6 Park assist steering loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
14.7 Park assist steering button E581 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
15 Reversing camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
15.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
15.2 Assembly overview - reversing camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
15.3 Removing and installing reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
15.4 Reversing camera system control unit J772 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
15.5 Calibrating reversing camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
15.6 Renewing video cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
16 Lane departure warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
16.1 Assembly overview - lane departure warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
16.2 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
16.3 Removing and installing front camera for driver assist systems R242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
16.4 Removing and installing windscreen heater for front sensors Z113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212


1 Interior lights and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
1.1 Interior monitoring deactivation switch E267 and deactivation button for vehicle inclination
sender E360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
2 Lights and switches in engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.1 Removing and installing bonnet contact switch F266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
3 Lights and switches in dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
3.1 Light switch E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
3.2 Headlight range control regulator E102 and switch and instrument illumination regulator E20
...................................................................... 216
3.3 Glove compartment light W6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
3.4 Hazard warning light switch E3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
3.5 Left footwell light W9 and right footwell light W10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
3.6 Key operated switch to deactivate front passenger side airbag E224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
4 Lights and switches in front doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
4.1 Driver side window regulator switch module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
4.2 Mirror adjustment switch on passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4.3 Window regulator switch in front passenger door E107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
4.4 Driver side interior locking button for central locking system E308 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4.5 Central locking SAFELOCK function warning lamp K133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
4.6 Door warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

iv Contents
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

5 Lights and switches in rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234


5.1 Rear right window regulator button in rear right door E705 and rear left window regulator
button in rear left door E700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
6 Lights and switches in luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6.1 Luggage compartment light W3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6.2 Rear lid lock unit F256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
6.3 Button to close rear lid in luggage compartment E406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
7 Lights and switches in roof trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
7.1 Front interior light W1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
7.2 Rear interior light W43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7.3 Left and right interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
7.4 Removing and installing front passenger side illuminated vanity mirror W14 and driver side
illuminated vanity mirror W20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
8 Lights and switches in centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
8.1 Buttons in centre console storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
8.2 Front passenger side airbag deactivated warning lamp K145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
8.3 Electromechanical parking brake button and auto-hold button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
8.4 AC/DC converter with socket, 12 V-230 V U13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
9 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
9.1 Treble horn H2 and bass horn H7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
10 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
10.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
10.2 Immobiliser control unit J362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
10.3 Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
10.4 New identity on renewing all components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
10.5 Online system test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
11 Anti-theft alarm (ATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
11.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
11.2 Assembly overview - anti-theft alarm (ATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
11.3 Activating and deactivating anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
11.4 Interior monitoring deactivation switch E267 and deactivation button for vehicle inclination
sender E360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
11.5 Anti-theft alarm sensor G578 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
11.6 Vehicle inclination sender G384 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
11.7 Interior monitoring sensor G273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
11.8 Central locking and anti-theft alarm system aerial R47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
11.9 Alarm horn H12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
11.10 Adaptations of anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

97 - Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
1 Vehicle diagnosis, testing and information systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
2 Fuse holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
2.1 Fuse holder in dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
2.2 Fuse holder in electronics box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
3 Relay carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
3.1 Relay carrier on left of dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4 Electronics boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.1 Electronics box on left side of engine compartment (engine compartment electronics box)
........................................................................ 269
5 Select Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.1 On-board supply control unit J519 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.2 Driver door control unit J386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.3 Front passenger door control unit J387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.4 Rear left door control unit J388 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
5.5 Rear right door control unit J389 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Contents v
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

5.6 Trailer detector control unit J345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278


6 Wiring harness and connector repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

vi Contents
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

27 – Starter, current supply, CCS


1 Battery - A-
(VRL012414; Edition 11.2018)

WARNING

Danger of injury! Observe warning notices and safety regula‐


tions ⇒ page 1 !

Caution

To prevent damage to the battery and vehicle, the following


should be observed concerning types of battery ⇒ page 1 .

1.1 Fundamentals for batteries


⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery

1.2 Types of battery


⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery

1.3 Warning notices and safety regulations


⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery

1.4 Battery terminal connection


⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep. gr. 27 ; Battery

1. Battery A 1
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2 Checking battery
⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep. gr. 27 ; Checking
battery

2 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3 Charging battery
⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep. gr. 27 ; Charging
battery

3. Charging battery 3
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

4 Disconnecting and connecting bat‐


tery

WARNING

Danger of injury! Observe warning notices and safety regula‐


tions ⇒ page 1 !

Battery recharging or jump start on vehicles with Start/Stop sys‐


tem:
For recharging or jump start on vehicles with start/stop system,
note the following: using charging cable, first connect battery pos‐
itive terminals, then body earth. This ensures that battery moni‐
toring control unit - J367- (battery sensor) is not shunted. The
direct charging of the battery on the negative terminal clamp
means that the battery sensor is shunted and the battery data are
not registered by the sensor while charging. Then, the values
concerning the battery state and saved in the data bus diagnostic
interface do not correspond to the values of the charged battery.

4.1 Assembly overview

1 - Earth wire battery terminal


clamp
❑ Comply with instruc‐
tions regarding threa‐
ded connections of bat‐
tery terminals
⇒ page 1 .
❑ Vehicles with a start/
stop system have bat‐
tery monitoring control
unit - J367- (battery sen‐
sor) installed in addition.
Observe notes
⇒ page 4 .
2 - Securing nut for earth wire
battery terminal clamp
❑ M6
❑ 6 Nm
3 - Positive wire battery termi‐
nal clamp
❑ Comply with instruc‐
tions regarding threa‐
ded connections of bat‐
tery terminals
⇒ page 1 .
4 - Securing nut for positive
wire battery terminal clamp
❑ M6
❑ 6 Nm
5 - Battery
❑ Disconnecting
⇒ page 5
❑ Connecting

4 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

⇒ page 6
6 - Clamping plate
❑ Observe assembly notes
7 - Clamping plate securing nut
❑ M8x35
❑ 20 Nm

4.2 Disconnecting battery

Note

♦ By disconnecting the battery earth wire (open circuit), safety


is ensured when carrying out work on the electrical system.
♦ The battery positive wire need only be disconnected for re‐
moval of the battery.

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
Vehicles with battery box:
– Open locking device -arrow- and remove cover.
Vehicles with battery protective jacket:

– Open cover -1- of battery protective jacket.

4. Disconnecting and connecting battery 5


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– First unscrew the nut of earth cable -1- and pull off battery
terminal clamp from battery negative terminal.
– Then unscrew the nut of positive cable -2- and pull off battery
terminal clamp from battery positive terminal.

4.3 Connecting battery

Caution

Comply with instructions regarding threaded connections of


battery terminals ⇒ page 1 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

Note

After the battery has been reconnected and the ignition is switch‐
ed on, the ESP and TCS stabilisation programme warning lamp
- K155- and the warning lamp for electromechanically assisted
steering will light up permanently. The warning lamps will go out
automatically when the vehicle is driven at 15 to 20 km/h in a
straight line. This has the effect of reactivating the steering angle
sender - G85- .

6 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Push positive cable terminal clamp -2- onto the positive ter‐
minal of battery and then tighten securing nut to prescribed
torque ⇒ page 4 .
– Push earth cable terminal clamp -1- onto the negative terminal
of battery and then tighten securing nut to prescribed torque
⇒ page 4 .
– Work through steps listed in table after connecting.
Work steps after connecting battery
Procedure Performed
Switch ignition on with ignition
key or start button and then
switch off again.
Read fault memory: ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester, Guided
fault finding .
Check time on clock and
change as necessary.
Electric window regulators:
– Open and close all windows
to limit stop in each case.

– Finally when window is


closed, pull the switch until
the relay audibly switches.

– Check convenience func‐


tions of window regulator.
The window must close fully
in the convenience mode,
without holding the switch.
Radio/radio navigation system:
Check function, recode radio if
necessary
Clock:
Check time setting and reset if
necessary
Functional check: check all
electrical consumers.
Table can be printed out if necessary.
– Fit battery box cover or cover tab of battery protective jacket.

4. Disconnecting and connecting battery 7


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

5 Removing and installing battery

WARNING

Danger of injury! Observe warning notices and safety regula‐


tions ⇒ page 1 !

Replacing battery on vehicles with start/stop system:


Because of its higher deep-cycle resistance, only a special starter
battery is used in vehicles with a start/stop system.
When renewing the starter battery, note correct part designation
in ⇒ ETKA . Starter batteries for use in vehicles with a start/stop
system are marked with “AGM” (Absorbent Glass Mat) or
“EFB” (Enhanced Flooded Battery).

Note

♦ The battery parametrisation must be performed after installing


a new starter battery on vehicles with a battery sensor.
♦ The battery parametrisation sends the technical data of the
new battery to the battery monitor.
♦ Performing battery parametrisation ⇒ page 10 .

5.1 Assembly overview

8 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Earth wire battery clamp


❑ Comply with instruc‐
tions regarding threa‐
ded connections of bat‐
tery terminals ⇒ page 1
❑ Vehicles with a start/
stop system have bat‐
tery monitoring control
unit - J367- (battery sen‐
sor) installed in addition.
Observe notes
⇒ page 4 .
2 - Securing nut for earth wire
battery clamp
❑ M6
❑ 6 Nm
3 - Positive wire battery clamp
❑ Comply with instruc‐
tions regarding threa‐
ded connections of bat‐
tery terminals ⇒ page 1
4 - Securing nut for positive
wire battery clamp
❑ M6
❑ 6 Nm
5 - Battery
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 9
6 - Clamping plate
7 - Clamping plate securing nut
❑ M8 x 35
❑ 35 Nm

5.2 Removing and installing battery


Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove air filter housing ⇒ Power unit; Rep. gr. 23 ; Repairing
diesel direct injection system; Assembly overview - air filter

5. Removing and installing battery 9


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Depending on equipment, pull either panel of battery box or


fleece bag upwards in direction of -arrow- off battery.

– Unscrew securing bolt -1- and remove securing bar -2-.

– Fold up handles -arrows- (if fitted) and remove battery up‐


wards out of vehicle.
Installing:

Caution

A loosely fitted battery creates the following dangers:


♦ Shortened service life caused by vibration damage (dan‐
ger of explosion).
♦ The plates in the battery cells will be damaged if the bat‐
tery is not secured correctly.
♦ Damage to battery casing by clamping bracket (possible
leakage of acid with high consequential costs).
♦ Poor crash safety.

Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐


serve the following:
– Tighten threaded connections to specified torque given in as‐
sembly overview ⇒ page 8 .
– After installing battery, check it is firmly seated.
– Connect battery ⇒ page 4 .

5.3 Battery parameterisation


When a new battery is installed the battery parameterisation
sends the technical data of the new battery to the battery monitor.
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

10 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

6 Starter, vehicles with manual gear‐


box
Renewing starter on vehicles with start/stop system:
Due to the higher requirements on the starter when the start/stop
system is activated, e.g. in urban traffic/driving, the deep-cycle
resistance has been increased and the starter ring gear rein‐
forced.
When renewing starter, note correct part number designation in
ETKA. Components adapted to start/stop system are not identi‐
fied separately and are not or barely different from normal com‐
ponents in their appearance.

6.1 Checking starter - B-


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

6.2 Starter, vehicles with 1.4l, 110 KW TSI


engine and manual gearbox MQ200-6F

6.2.1 Assembly overview

1 - Starter motor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 12
❑ Checking ⇒ page 11
2 - Battery positive wire con‐
nection to starter
3 - Battery positive wire secur‐
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
4 - Starter securing bolts
❑ M12
❑ 75 Nm
5 - Protective cap
6 - Wiring retainer securing
bolts
❑ M8
❑ 23 Nm
7 - Wiring retainer

6. Starter, vehicles with manual gearbox 11


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Not illustrated
♦ Bolt for securing air filter housing to body: 10 Nm

6.2.2 Removing and installing starter, 1.4 l,


90 KW TSI engine, manual gearbox MQ
200-6F
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1332-

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove air filter box ⇒ Engine mixture preparation; Rep. gr.
24 ; Repairing injection system; Removing and installing air
filter .
– Push protective cap -1- off solenoid switch downwards in di‐
rection of -arrow-.

12 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release connector -1- and disconnect.


– Unscrew securing nut -2- and remove positive cable -3- from
mounting thread of solenoid switch.

– Unscrew securing nut -1- of cable retainer -2-.


– Remove noise insulation ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 50 ; Body, front; Noise insulation .

– Unscrew securing nut -2- and remove cable retainer -1- from
starter securing bolts.

– Undo upper starter bolt -arrow-.

6. Starter, vehicles with manual gearbox 13


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Unscrew lower securing bolt of starter -2- and remove starter


-1- downwards out of vehicle.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Tighten threaded connections to torque specified in assembly
overview ⇒ page 11 .

6.3 Starter, vehicles with 2.0 l 103 KW TDI


engine and manual gearbox MQ350-6F

6.3.1 Assembly overview

1 - Starter motor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 15
❑ Checking ⇒ page 11
2 - Battery positive wire con‐
nection to starter
3 - Battery positive wire secur‐
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
4 - Starter securing bolts
❑ M12
❑ 75 Nm
5 - Protective cap
6 - Wiring retainer securing
bolts
❑ M8
❑ 23 Nm
7 - Wiring retainer

Not illustrated
♦ Bolt for securing air filter housing to body: 10 Nm

14 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

6.3.2 Removing and installing starter, 2.0 l, 103 KW TDI engine, manual gearbox
MQ350-6F

Special tools and workshop


equipment required

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-


♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1332-
♦ Pliers for spring-type clips - VAS 5024-
Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .

6. Starter, vehicles with manual gearbox 15


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Separate connector -1-, release spring-type clip -2- with


spring-type clip pliers - VAS 5024- and pull off vacuum hose
-3-.

– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- of air filter housing.

– Release locking lug -arrow- and remove cover.

– Pull hose -arrow- off air filter housing and remove.


– Pull air filter housing upwards out of brackets and remove from
engine compartment.

16 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Push protective cap -1- off solenoid switch downwards in di‐


rection of -arrow-.

– Release connector of terminal 50 -1- and separate.


– Unscrew securing nut -2- and remove positive cable -3-.

– Unscrew upper securing nut -1- of cable retainer -2-.


– Remove noise insulation ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 50 ; Body, front; Noise insulation .

– Unscrew lower securing nut -2- and pull off cable retainer -1-
from starter securing bolts.

6. Starter, vehicles with manual gearbox 17


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Undo upper starter bolt -arrow-.

– Undo lower starter bolt -arrow-.


– Remove starter by taking it downwards out of the vehicle.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Tighten threaded connections to specified torque given in as‐
sembly overview ⇒ page 14 .

18 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

7 Starter, vehicles with dual clutch


gearbox (DSG)
Renewing starter on vehicles with start/stop system:
Due to the higher requirements on the starter when the start/stop
system is activated, e.g. in urban traffic/driving, the deep-cycle
resistance has been increased and the starter ring gear rein‐
forced.
When renewing starter, note correct part number designation in
ETKA. Components adapted to start/stop system are not identi‐
fied separately and are not or barely different from normal com‐
ponents in their appearance.

7.1 Starter, vehicles with 2.0 l 103 kW TDI


engine and dual clutch gearbox
DQ250-6F

7.1.1 Assembly overview

1 - Battery positive wire con‐


nection to starter
2 - Battery positive wire secur‐
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
3 - Starter securing bolts
❑ M12
❑ 75 Nm
4 - Starter motor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 20
❑ Checking ⇒ page 11

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

7. Starter, vehicles with dual clutch gearbox (DSG) 19


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Not illustrated
♦ Bolt for securing air filter housing to body: 10 Nm

7.1.2 Removing and installing starter, 2.0 l, 103 KW TDI engine with dual clutch
gearbox (DSG) DQ250-6F

Special tools and workshop


equipment required

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-


♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1332-
♦ Pliers for spring-type clips - VAS 5024-
Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .

20 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Separate connector -1-, release spring-type clip -2- with


spring-type clip pliers - VAS 5024- and pull off vacuum hose
-3-.

– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- of air filter housing.

– Release locking lug -arrow- and remove cover.

– Pull hose -arrow- off air filter housing and remove.


– Pull air filter housing upwards out of brackets and remove from
engine compartment.

7. Starter, vehicles with dual clutch gearbox (DSG) 21


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Push protective cap -1- off solenoid switch downwards in di‐


rection of -arrow-.

– Release connector of terminal 50 -1- and separate.


– Unscrew securing nut -2- and remove positive cable -3-.

– Undo upper starter bolt -arrow-.

– Undo lower starter bolt -arrow-.


– Remove starter by taking it upwards out of the vehicle.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Tighten threaded connections to specified torque given in as‐
sembly overview ⇒ page 19 .

22 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

8 Alternator

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Note

Checking alternator ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault find‐


ing and Fitting locations .

Renewing alternator on vehicles with start/stop system:


Until now the alternator and the voltage regulator were connected
together via their own wires to the engine and onboard supply
control unit. For vehicles with start/stop system, the information
transmission occurs via a LIN data bus to the diagnostic interface
for data bus. Via the CAN data bus, it supplies information to other
control units such as the engine control unit.

8.1 Securing B+ (battery positive) wire to al‐


ternator

Caution

If the battery positive wire is not tightened to the specified tor‐


que, there is a risk of the following:
♦ The battery will not be charged fully.
♦ Vehicle electrics or electronics fail completely (break‐
down).
♦ Danger of fires from sparks
♦ Damage to electronic components and control units due
to excessive voltage

– The torque setting for the battery positive wire -arrow- securing
nut is 15 Nm.

8.2 Checking poly V-belt


– Crank engine at vibration damper/belt pulley using a socket.
– Check poly V-belt for:
♦ Sub-surface cracks (cracks, core ruptures, cross sectional
breaks)

8. Alternator 23
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Layer separation (top layer, cord strands)


♦ Eruptions on bottom cover
♦ Fraying of carcass
♦ Flank wear (material wear, frayed flanks, flank brittleness -
glassy flanks-, surface cracks)
♦ Oil and grease marks

Caution

If faults are found, it is essential for the poly V-belt to be re‐


newed. This will avoid possible breakdowns or operating prob‐
lems.

8.3 Checking alternator - C-


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

8.4 Alternator, 1.4 l, 110 KW TSI engine

8.4.1 Assembly overview

1 - Multi-point socket head bolt


❑ M8 x 45
❑ 23 Nm
2 - Upper tensioning roller
3 - Valve timing housing
4 - Hexagon flange bolts
❑ M8 x 45
❑ 23 Nm
5 - Hexagon flange nut
❑ M8
❑ Securing nut for B+ wire
on rear of alternator
❑ 15 Nm
6 - Cross-head screw
❑ M5 x 21
❑ 4.5 Nm
7 - Hexagon nut, flat
❑ M8
8 - Washer
❑ M5
9 - Protective cap
10 - Cross-head bolts
❑ M4 x 19
❑ 2 Nm
11 - Cross-head screw
❑ M4 x 13
❑ 2 Nm

24 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

12 - Voltage regulator
❑ Removing and installing voltage regulator ⇒ page 38
13 - Alternator
❑ Removing and installing alternator ⇒ page 25
❑ Checking alternator ⇒ page 24
❑ Securing B+ wire to alternator ⇒ page 23
❑ Removing and installing poly V-belt pulley on alternator ⇒ page 33
14 - Poly V-belt
❑ Poly V-belt routing ⇒ Power unit; Rep. gr. 13 ; Dismantling and assembling engine
❑ Checking poly V-belt ⇒ page 23
15 - Hexagon head flange bolts
❑ M8 x 90
❑ 23 Nm
16 - Centring sleeves
❑ Insert in bracket before installing air conditioner compressor
❑ Bolts for securing air conditioner compressor to bracket (M8 x 100) 23 Nm
17 - Lower tensioning roller
18 - Bracket
❑ For tensioning element and air conditioner compressor
19 - Hexagon head flange bolt
❑ M10 x 65
❑ 45 Nm

Not illustrated
♦ M5 securing nut on back of alternator for wiring clamp - 3.2 Nm

8.4.2 Removing and installing alternator, 1.4


l, 110 KW TSI engine

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

8. Alternator 25
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Removing engine cover ⇒ Power unit; Rep. gr. 15 ; Engine
cover .
– Remove poly V-belt ⇒ Power unit; Rep. gr. 13 ; Dismantling
and assembling engine; Removing and installing poly V-belt .
– Release tension in upper tensioning roller again.
– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- and remove upper belt ten‐
sioner from vehicle.

– Unscrew securing bolts of air conditioner compressor


-arrows-.

– Release connector -1- and disconnect.


– Undo the third bolt -arrow- and remove air conditioner com‐
pressor from bracket.

26 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Note

♦ When removing the air conditioner compressor, ensure that


both centring sleeves remain in the threaded holes (one on top
of the other) of the bracket.
♦ The hoses of the air conditioner compressor can remain con‐
nected.
♦ Suspend the air conditioner compressor -3- using a piece of
wire -1- at a suitable position beneath the vehicle until it is
ready to be reinstalled.
♦ Ensure, when doing this, that the hoses -2- are not stretched
or kinked.

– Unlock and disconnect connector of DF cable -1-.


– Lever off protective cap -2-.

– Undo nut -1- and detach the B+ wire under it from the con‐
necting thread of the alternator.
– Undo nuts -3- and remove cable retainer -2- from alternator.

– Undo bolts securing alternator -arrows-.


– Remove alternator by taking it downwards out of the vehicle.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Caution

♦ When fitting used poly V-belts observe the direction of ro‐


tation marked on removal!
♦ Before installing poly V-belt, make sure that all ancillaries
(alternator, air conditioner compressor, power assisted
steering vane pump) are secured tightly.
♦ When fitting belt, ensure that poly V-belt seats correctly in
pulleys!

8. Alternator 27
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Drive threaded sleeves -A- approx. 4 mm in


-direction of arrow- out of alternator housing.

– Secure cable retainer -arrow- on back of alternator in 9 o'clock


position.

Note

Before installing the air conditioner compressor, ensure that both


centring sleeves are inserted in the threaded holes (one above
the other) of the bracket.

– Tighten threaded connections to specified torque given in as‐


sembly overview ⇒ page 24 .

Caution

Comply with instructions regarding threaded connections of


battery terminals ⇒ page 1 .

– Connect battery ⇒ page 4 .


– Start engine and check belt running.

8.5 Alternator, 2.0 l, 103 KW TDI engine

8.5.1 Assembly overview

28 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Hexagon bolt with washer


and threaded element
❑ M4 x 20, M4 x 15
❑ 2 Nm
2 - Protective cap for alternator
3 - Cross-head bolts
❑ M4 x 20
❑ 2 Nm
4 - Protective cap for carbon
brushes
5 - Voltage regulator
❑ Removing and installing
voltage regulator
⇒ page 38
6 - Alternator
❑ Removing and installing
alternator ⇒ page 29
❑ Checking alternator
⇒ page 24
❑ Securing B+ wire to al‐
ternator ⇒ page 23
❑ Removing and installing
poly V-belt pulley on al‐
ternator ⇒ page 33
7 - Poly V-belt
❑ Poly V-belt routing ⇒
Power unit; Rep. gr. 13 ;
Dismantling and assem‐
bling engine
❑ Checking poly V-belt
⇒ page 23
8 - Hexagon head flange bolts
❑ M8 x 90
❑ 20 Nm

Not illustrated
♦ M5 securing nut on back of alternator for wiring clamp - 3.2 Nm
♦ M8 securing bolts of air conditioner compressor on ancillary
bracket - 23 Nm

8.5.2 Removing and installing alternator, 2.0 l


TDI engine, 103 KW

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

8. Alternator 29
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

♦ Locking pin - T10060 A-

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Pull engine cover off upwards -arrows-.

30 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- from charge air pipe.


– Disconnect connector from charge pressure sender - G31-
-1-.
– Open clamp -2-.
– Move coolant hose -3- clear to one side, and remove charge
air pipe.

Caution

Before removing, mark the top side and direction of rotation of


the poly V-belt. When installing, ensure correct fitting position
and direction of rotation. If the belt is installed in the wrong
position or against direction of rotation, the belt will be de‐
stroyed!

– Remove poly V-belt ⇒ Power unit; Rep. gr. 13 ; Dismantling


and assembling engine .
– Removing and installing radiator cowl together with radiator
fan - V7- and radiator fan on right of radiator - V35- ⇒ Rep.
gr. 19 ; Repairing cooling system; Removing and installing
radiator cowl together with radiator fan -V7- and radiator fan
on right of radiator -V35- .

– Release connector -1- and disconnect.

– Unscrew securing bolts of air conditioner compressor


-arrows-.

Note

♦ The hoses of the air conditioner compressor can remain con‐


nected.
♦ Suspend the air conditioner compressor using a piece of wire
at a suitable position until it is ready to be reinstalled.
♦ When doing this, the hoses must not be kinked or stretched.

8. Alternator 31
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release and disconnect connector of DF cable -1-.


– Lever off protective cap -2-.
– Undo nut -1- and detach the B+ wire under it from the con‐
necting thread of the alternator.

– Undo nuts -3- and remove cable retainer -2- from alternator.

– Unscrew both securing bolts -1- and securing nut -2- and place
fuel filter -3- to one side. The fuel hoses can then remain con‐
nected.

– Undo and remove the two bolts -arrows- securing the alterna‐
tor.
– Remove alternator by taking it downwards out of the vehicle.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Caution

♦ When installing used poly V-belts observe the direction of


rotation marked on removal!
♦ Before installing poly V-belt, ensure that all ancillaries (al‐
ternator, air conditioning compressor) are secure.
♦ When fitting belt, ensure that poly V-belt seats correctly in
pulleys!

32 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Drive threaded sleeves -A- about 4 mm in direction of arrow


out of alternator housing.

– Tighten wiring retainer -arrow- on back of alternator in 3 o'clock


position.
– Tighten threaded connections to torque specified in assembly
overview ⇒ page 28 .

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

– Connect battery ⇒ page 4 .


– Start engine and check belt running.

8.6 Removing and installing poly V-belt pul‐


ley on alternator

8.6.1 Removing and installing poly V-belt pul‐


ley without freewheel
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Socket 24 mm - VAS 3310-

8. Alternator 33
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1332-

Removing:
– Remove alternator ⇒ page 23 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Use socket - VAS 3310- to unscrew poly V-belt pulley securing
nut from alternator shaft.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– Tighten threaded connection to specified torque of 65 Nm.

8.6.2 Removing and installing poly V-belt pul‐


ley with freewheel, manufacturer: Bosch
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Multipoint adapter - VAS 3400-

34 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1332-

Removing:
– Remove alternator ⇒ page 23 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Remove protective cap from poly V-belt pulley with freewheel.
– Insert multi-point adapter - VAS 3400- with 17mm AF ring
spanner in poly V-belt pulley with freewheel of alternator.
– Insert an M10 multi-point bit -1- into alternator shaft.
– Counterhold alternator shaft and loosen poly V-belt pulley with
freewheel anti-clockwise.
– Hold poly V-belt pulley with freewheel by hand. Turn alternator
drive shaft until poly V-belt pulley with freewheel can be re‐
moved.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– First screw poly V-belt pulley with freewheel on drive shaft of
alternator by hand as far as limit stop.
The torque wrench - V.A.G 1332- must be modified for assembly
of poly V-belt with freewheel as follows:

– Release socket drive -1- and pull off grip -2-.


– Turn torque wrench grip -2- 180° and reinsert socket drive.
– Set turning direction of torque wrench to anti-clockwise at
socket drive.

8. Alternator 35
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Insert an M10 multi-point bit -1- into alternator shaft.


– Counterhold using multi-point adapter - VAS 3400- with ring
spanner 17 mm AF.
– Tighten poly V-belt with freewheel by turning drive shaft of al‐
ternator anti-clockwise using torque wrench - V.A.G 1332- .
– Tighten threaded connection to specified torque of 80 Nm.

8.6.3 Removing and installing poly V-belt pulley with freewheel, manufacturer:
Valeo

Special tools and workshop


equipment required

36 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Multipoint adapter - VAS 3400-


♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1332-
♦ TORX driver bit - V.A.G 1603/1-
Removing:
– Remove alternator ⇒ page 23 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Remove protective cap from poly V-belt pulley with freewheel.
– Insert multi-point adapter - VAS 3400- with 17mm AF ring
spanner in poly V-belt pulley with freewheel of alternator.
– Insert TORX driver bit - V.A.G 1603/1- in alternator shaft.
– Hold alternator shaft in place and loosen poly V-belt pulley with
freewheel using a ring spanner. Loosen in anti-clockwise di‐
rection.
– Hold poly V-belt pulley with freewheel by hand. Turn alternator
drive shaft until poly V-belt pulley with freewheel can be re‐
moved.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– First screw poly V-belt pulley with freewheel on drive shaft of
alternator by hand as far as limit stop.
The torque wrench - V.A.G 1332- must be modified for assembly
of poly V-belt with freewheel as follows:

– Release socket drive -1- and pull off grip -2-.


– Turn torque wrench grip -2- 180° and reinsert socket drive.
– Set turning direction of torque wrench to anti-clockwise at
socket drive.

8. Alternator 37
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Insert TORX driver bit - V.A.G 1603/1- in alternator shaft.


– Counterhold using multi-point adapter - VAS 3400- with ring
spanner 17 mm AF.
– Tighten poly V-belt with freewheel by turning drive shaft of al‐
ternator anti-clockwise using torque wrench - V.A.G 1332- .
– Tighten threaded connection to specified torque of 80 Nm.

8.7 Voltage regulator for alternator

8.7.1 Removing and installing voltage regula‐


tor, manufacturer: Bosch
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque screwdriver - V.A.G 1624-

Removing:
– Remove alternator ⇒ page 23 .
– Remove securing bolt and nuts -arrows- (4.5 Nm) and remove
protective cap from alternator.

38 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Unscrew securing bolts of voltage regulator -arrows- (2 Nm).


– Remove voltage regulator from alternator.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.
– Tighten threaded connections to specified torques.

8.7.2 Removing and installing voltage regula‐


tor, manufacturer: Valeo
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1783/-

Removing:
– Remove alternator ⇒ page 23 .
– Remove clamp rings -arrows- and remove protective cap from
alternator.

– Remove securing bolts of voltage regulator -arrows- (2 Nm).


– Remove voltage regulator from alternator.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

8. Alternator 39
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release locking lugs -arrows- and pull protective cap off volt‐
age regulator.
– Push carbon brushes into housing of voltage regulator and in‐
sert voltage regulator into alternator.
– Tighten threaded connections to specified torques.

– Push protective cap into guide rails -arrows- until it can be


heard to engage.

40 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

9 Cruise control system (CCS)


⇒ Electrical System, General Information; Rep. gr. 27 ; Cruise
control system (CCS) .

9. Cruise control system (CCS) 41


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

10 Start/stop system

10.1 General description

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual of vehicle


⇒ Self-study programme No. 426 ; The start/stop system 2009
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
General description:
The start/stop system is used for reducing fuel consumption by
automatically switching off the engine when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and automatically starting it when the driver wants the
vehicle to move on. The start/stop mode is automatically activated
when, after moving on, the vehicle is driven for about four seconds
at a minimal speed of 3 km/h.
Fault detection and fault display:
The start/stop system as a function is integrated in the engine
control unit - J623- software.
The engine control unit - J623- features self-diagnosis to facilitate
fault finding.
For fault finding, use the systems described in chapter “Vehicle
diagnosis, testing and information system” in “Guided Fault Find‐
ing” mode ⇒ page 265 .
Battery recharging or jump start on vehicles with Start/Stop sys‐
tem:
For recharging or jump start on vehicles with start/stop system,
note the following: using charging cable, first connect battery pos‐
itive terminals, then body earth. This ensures that the battery
sensor is not shunted. The direct charging of the battery on the
negative terminal clamp means that the battery sensor is shunted
and the battery data are not registered by the sensor while charg‐
ing. Then, the values concerning the battery state and saved in
the data bus diagnostic interface would not correspond to the val‐
ues of the charged battery.
Renewing battery on vehicles with start/stop system:
Because of its higher deep-cycle resistance, only an absorbent
glass mat battery is used as a starter battery instead of the normal
lead battery in vehicles with start/stop system.
In case of repair, note correct part number designation in ETKA.
Components adapted to start/stop system are not identified sep‐
arately and are not or barely different from normal components in
their appearance.

42 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Note

♦ The battery parametrisation must be performed after installing


a new starter battery on vehicles with a battery sensor.
♦ The battery parametrisation sends the technical data of the
new battery to the battery monitor.
♦ Performing battery parametrisation ⇒ page 10 .

Following components are involved in the start/stop system:


♦ Battery - A- ⇒ page 1
♦ Alternator - C- ⇒ page 23
♦ Voltage regulator - C1-
♦ Starter - B- ⇒ page 11
♦ Brake light switch - F-
♦ Clutch pedal switch - F36-
♦ Start/stop operation switch - E693- ⇒ page 43
♦ Coolant temperature sender - G62-
♦ Accelerator pedal position sender - G79-
♦ Gearbox neutral position sender - G701-
♦ Control unit for ABS with EDL - J104-
♦ Climatronic control unit - J255-
♦ Control unit with display in dash panel insert - J285-
⇒ page 45
♦ Battery monitor control unit - J367- ⇒ page 1
♦ Convenience system central control unit - J393-
♦ Power steering control unit - J500-
♦ On-board supply control unit - J519- ⇒ page 273
♦ Voltage stabiliser - J532- ⇒ page 43
♦ Data bus diagnostic interface - J533- ⇒ page 45
♦ Engine control unit - J623-
♦ Park assist steering control unit - J791- ⇒ page 189

10.2 Start/stop operation switch - E693-


The start/stop operation switch - E693- is located in the centre
console switch panel in front of the gear lever. It serves to switch
off manually the start/stop system.

10.2.1 Removing and installing Start/Stop op‐


eration button - E693-
Removal and installation of the start/stop operation switch - E693-
are carried out in the same way for all switches in the centre
console switch panel ⇒ page 249 .

10.3 Voltage stabiliser - J532-


The voltage stabiliser - J532- is installed in the dash panel insert
behind the glove compartment. It has the task of stabilizing to 12
volts the high voltage fluctuations generated in the onboard sup‐
ply by the start/stop operation.

10. Start/stop system 43


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Effects in case of voltage stabiliser failure:


If the voltage stabiliser is defective, devices like radio, radio nav‐
igation or telephone will perform a reset if their own voltage supply
is not sufficient when the starter is operated. If, in start/stop mode,
the mentioned electrical consumers are identified as causing a
reset for each engine start, this indicates a defective voltage sta‐
biliser. A direct entry concerning a malfunction of the voltage
regulator, e.g. in the fault memory of the diagnostic interface or
the onboard supply control unit, does not occur at present. If radio,
radio navigation and telephone units fail together, first check fuse
of voltage regulator.

10.3.1 Removing and installing voltage stabil‐


iser - J532- , ► week 22/11
Removing:
– Remove glove compartment ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trims; Removing and
installing glove compartment .
– Release connector -1- and disconnect.
– Press release button on plastic frame -arrow A-, push voltage
regulator - J532- -2- together with plastic frame in
-direction of arrow- off bracket and remove.
Installing:
Install in reverse order of removal.

10.3.2 Removing and installing voltage stabil‐


iser - J532- , week 23/11 ►
Removing:
– Remove plenum chamber cover ⇒ General body repairs, ex‐
terior; Rep. gr. 50 ; Plenum chamber cover .
– Disconnect electrical connector -4-.
– Unscrew bolts -3-.
– Remove voltage stabiliser - J532- -1- from bracket -2-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
Specified torque
Component Specified torque
Bolts on voltage stabiliser - 6 Nm
J532-

44 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

90 – Gauges, instruments
1 Dash panel insert

1.1 General description

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011


General description:
The following components are integrated in the dash panel insert:
♦ Brake fluid level warning contact - F34-
♦ Vertical acceleration sender - G90-
♦ Fuel gauge - G1-
♦ Ambient temperature sensor - G17-
♦ Speedometer - G21-
♦ Speedometer sender - G22-
♦ Oil level and oil temperature sender - G266-
♦ Coolant temperature gauge - G3-
♦ Rev. counter - G5-
♦ Oil pressure warning buzzer - H11-
♦ Buzzer and gong - H3-
♦ Multifunction display - J119-
♦ Control unit in dash panel insert - J285-
♦ Display unit for navigation system - J414-
♦ Trip counter - Y4-
♦ Vehicle voltage display - Y11-
♦ Oil temperature gauge - Y12-
♦ Digital clock - Y2-
♦ Selector lever position display - Y6-
♦ Immobiliser control unit - J362-
To provide acoustic support to some of the visual displays, the
dash panel features a warning buzzer, which is actuated by the
control unit.
All warning lamps are fitted with light-emitting diodes (LEDs). No
provision is made for dash panel insert repair. If necessary, the
dash panel insert is renewed as a unit ⇒ page 46 .
The data bus diagnostic interface - J533- (gateway) is an individ‐
ual control unit option and not part of the dash panel insert, unlike
on several other vehicles.

1. Dash panel insert 45


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Fault detection and fault display:


The dash panel insert is equipped with self-diagnosis, which
makes fault finding easier.
Fault finding ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Find-
ing .

1.2 Renewing dash panel insert


The procedure “Renewing dash panel insert” covers the following
additional tasks:
♦ If a new dash panel insert is installed in the vehicle, the control
unit of the dash panel insert must be adjusted to the different
equipment features and associated country settings.
♦ To adapt the integrated immobiliser to the engine control unit,
the data from the engine control unit has to be stored in the
replacement dash panel insert.
♦ Furthermore, if a new dash panel insert is installed, all ignition
keys must be adapted.

Note

On vehicles with KESSY (keyless entry Start/Stop system), the


terminal 15 voltage supply relay 2 - J681- must be bridged ⇒ Cur‐
rent flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Vehicle diagnostic tester
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

1.3 Removing and installing dash panel in‐


sert

Note

Before renewing the dash panel insert, the work procedure “Re‐
newing dash panel insert” should always be carried out in order
that the data stored in the control unit can be read ⇒ page 46 .

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

Note

There is no need to remove the steering wheel.

– Pull steering wheel fully out and lock it in lowest position.


– Remove upper part of steering column trim ⇒ General body
repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim;
Removing and installing steering column trim .

46 Rep. gr.90 - Gauges, instruments


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove securing screws -arrows- of dash panel.


– Pull dash panel insert backwards straight out of dash panel,
taking connected wiring length into consideration.

– Swing securing bar -1- in -direction of arrow- and pull off con‐
nector -2-.
– Remove dash panel insert from vehicle.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

1.4 Description of back of dash panel insert

Note

The dash panel insert must not be dismantled. If necessary, the


dash panel insert is renewed as a unit.

1- Warning buzzer
2- 32-pin connector

1.5 Pin assignment of connectors on dash


panel insert
For pin assignment of connectors on dash panel insert, refer to
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions.

1. Dash panel insert 47


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2 Service interval display

2.1 Resetting service interval display


– Resetting service interval display in “Maintenance Manual”:
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

48 Rep. gr.90 - Gauges, instruments


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

92 – Windscreen wash/wipe system


1 windscreen wiper system.

1.1 General description

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011
General description:
The wiper motor control unit - J400- and the wiper motor - - are
combined to form one unit.
To remove wiper blades, move wiper arms to “service/winter po‐
sition”. The “service/winter position” is activated within 10 sec‐
onds after ignition is switched off by pressing wiper lever in “flick
wipe” position ⇒ Operating manual of vehicle .

Note

The following descriptions of the windscreen wiper system refer


to a LHD vehicle. Unless the description states otherwise, the in‐
dividual modules are removed and installed using the corre‐
sponding mirror-image procedure in RHD vehicles.

Fault detection and fault display:


Fault finding ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Find-
ing .

1.2 Deactivating APP function of wiper mo‐


tor
Special tools and workshop equipment required

1. windscreen wiper system. 49


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Vehicle diagnostic tester

The windscreen wiper system is equipped with an APP function


(alternating park position system).
With the APS function, the wiper arm is moved up slightly once it
has reached the lowest position. This occurs every second time
the wiper system is switched off.
The wiper motor must be set to the bottom park position for at‐
taching the crank to the motor. This is done by deactivating the
APP function (coding wiper motor control unit - J400- ).

Note

♦ The APP function cannot be activated.


♦ After 100 cycles of wiper movement, the APP function is acti‐
vated automatically. This applies to wiper motors on which the
APP function has been deactivated and also to new wiper mo‐
tors.

⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

1.3 Assembly overview - windscreen wiper system

50 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Wiper arm securing nut to


linkage
❑ 32 Nm
2 - Joint-free wipers
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 57
❑ Adjusting park position
⇒ page 56
3 - Wiper arms
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 55
4 - Wiper frame securing bolts
with linkage to body
❑ 8 Nm
5 - Securing bolts of wiper mo‐
tor in wiper frame
❑ 9 Nm
6 - Wiper frame with linkage
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 53
7 - Wiper motor - V- with con‐
trol unit for wiper motor - J400-
❑ Removing from wiper
frame and installing
⇒ page 54
❑ Coding wiper motor
control unit and deacti‐
vating APP function
⇒ page 49
8 - Rubber grommet in bulk‐
head
❑ Observe installation
notes ⇒ page 55

Not illustrated
♦ Nut for securing wiper motor crank to wiper motor shaft: 25 Nm

1.4 Removing and installing windscreen


wiper system

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

1. windscreen wiper system. 51


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

♦ Removal lever - 80-200-

♦ Puller - T10369-

1.4.1 Removing windscreen wiper system


– Deactivate APP function ⇒ page 49 .
– Move wipers to park position and then switch off ignition.
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .

Note

In order for wiper frame to be removed with linkage and wiper


motor, wiper arms and plenum chamber cover must first be re‐
moved.

52 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1.4.2 Removing wiper arms

– Lever off cover caps -arrows- using a screwdriver.


– Remove securing nuts -arrows-.

– Slide arms of puller - T10369/1- -2-, as shown in illustration,


under wiper arm -4-.

Caution

The wiper shaft may be damaged.


Always use thrust piece -3- to loosen wiper arm.

– Turn thrust bolt -1- of puller clockwise until thrust piece -3-
comes into contact with wiper shaft. Turn thrust bolt -1- of
puller clockwise using an Allen key (6 mm AF) until wiper arm
-4- is loosened off shaft.
– Remove puller and wiper arm.

1.4.3 Removing plenum chamber cover


Removing and installing plenum chamber cover ⇒ General body
repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 50 ; Plenum chamber cover .

1.4.4 Removing wiper frame with linkage and


wiper motor
– Remove plenum chamber bulkhead ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 50 ; Plenum chamber bulkhead .

1. windscreen wiper system. 53


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release connector -1- and disconnect.


– Unscrew both securing bolts -arrows- and remove wiper frame
with linkage and wiper motor -2- upwards out of vehicle.

1.4.5 Removing wiper motor from wiper frame


– Lever off ball head -arrow- from motor crank using lever -
80-200- and swing linkage -1- to one side.

– Unscrew securing nut -1-, and pull motor crank -2- off wiper
motor shaft.
– Unscrew three securing bolts -arrows- and remove wiper mo‐
tor with control unit from wiper frame.

1.4.6 Installing wiper motor in wiper frame


– Insert wiper motor with control unit in wiper frame and secure
with three securing bolts -arrows-.
– Tighten securing bolts to torque specified in assembly over‐
view ⇒ page 50 .

54 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Place motor crank -1- on shaft of wiper motor. Distance -A- to


limit stop -2- should be 5 ± 1 mm.
– Connect motor crank to shaft of wiper motor with securing nut
-3-.
– Tighten securing nut to torque specified in assembly overview
⇒ page 50 .

– Press ball head -arrow- of linkage -1- onto motor crank.

1.4.7 Installing windscreen wiper system


Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Securing pin on wiper frame -2- must be inserted in rubber
grommet on bulkhead when installing.
– Tighten threaded connections to specified torque given in as‐
sembly overview ⇒ page 50 .
– Fit connector to wiper motor connection and lock in position.
– Install plenum chamber cover ⇒ General body repairs, exte‐
rior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Plenum chamber cover .
– Install plenum chamber bulkhead ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 50 ; Plenum chamber bulkhead .
– Connect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Installing wiper arms ⇒ page 55 .

1.5 Removing and installing wiper arms


Removing:
– Remove wiper arms ⇒ page 53 .
Installing:

Note

The securing nuts of the wiper arms are not tightened to the
specified torques until the wiper blade park position has been ad‐
justed.

– If not yet carried out, deactivate the APP function ⇒ page 49 .

1. windscreen wiper system. 55


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– To move wiper motor to park position, switch wipers on and


off with ignition on.
– Fit the two wiper arms in approximate park position on wiper
arm shafts and tighten securing nuts -arrows- by hand.
– Adjust wiper blade park position ⇒ page 56 .

1.6 Adjusting wiper blade park position


Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

Note

On RHD vehicles, the wiper blades are a mirror image of those


on LHD vehicles.

– If not yet carried out, deactivate the APP function ⇒ page 49 .


– Move wipers to park position and then switch off ignition.
– Now, adjust wiper blade park position.

56 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Driver side:
The distance -A- between top of wiper lip and upper side of ple‐
num chamber cover must be 18 ± 5 mm.
– Adjust wiper blade park position by moving wiper arm if nec‐
essary ⇒ page 53 .
– Tighten threaded connections to specified torque given in as‐
sembly overview ⇒ page 50 .

Front passenger side:


The distance -B- between top of wiper lip and upper side of ple‐
num chamber cover must be 18 ± 5 mm.
– Adjust wiper blade park position by moving wiper arm if nec‐
essary ⇒ page 53 .
– Tighten threaded connections to specified torque given in as‐
sembly overview ⇒ page 50 .

1.7 Removing and installing joint-free wip‐


ers
Removing:

Note

♦ Driver and front passenger wiper blades must not be inter‐


changed when installing.
♦ Joint-free wipers are very flexible. Only touch wiper blades in
area of wiper blade attachment to lift off windscreen.
♦ To remove wiper blades, move wiper arms to “service/winter
position”. The “service/winter position” is activated within 10
seconds after ignition is switched off by pressing the wind‐
screen wiper lever in position “tip wipe”.

– Within 10 seconds of switching off ignition, press windscreen


wiper lever to “flick wipe” position in order to move wiper arms
to “service/winter position”.
– Lift up wiper arm.

1. windscreen wiper system. 57


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Press button -1- and pull wiper blade mounting -3- out of wiper
arm -2- in -direction of arrow-.
Installing:
– Push wiper blade mounting into wiper arm until it locks in place
audibly.
– Carefully fold wiper arm back onto front windscreen.

1.8 Removing and installing rain and light


sensor
The rain and light sensor - G397- can be found in the base of the
interior mirror and comprises the following components depend‐
ing on the equipment level:
♦ Rain sensor - G213-
♦ Light sensor - G399-
♦ Humidity sender for air conditioning system - G260-
Removing and installing rain and light sensor - G397-
⇒ page 58 .
Code rain and light sensor - G397- ⇒ page 61 .

1.8.1 Removing and installing rain and light


sensor - G397-

Note

♦ The rain and light sensor - G397- has a silicon layer (coupling
pad) which forms the contact surface to the windscreen.
♦ The rain and light sensors - G397- cannot be renewed arbi‐
trarily.
♦ Determine the correct rain and light sensor - G397- using the
part number ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue “ETKA” .
♦ If the rain and light sensor - G397- is replaced by a rain and
light sensor - G397- with a different part number, start the re‐
spective function ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

Removing
– Switch off ignition.
– Equipment version with ignition lock: withdraw ignition key.
– Remove interior mirror ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 68 ; Interior mirror; Removing and installing interior mirror .

58 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Disconnect electrical connector -3-.


– Insert a narrow screwdriver -5- in the hole as shown in illus‐
tration, and release catches of retaining spring -2- -arrows-.
– Wait 1 minute until silicone pad has fully expanded so that it
can be detached without leaving any residue.
– Detach rain and light sensor - G397- -item 4- by moving it back
and forth, and remove it from mounting -1-.

Caution

Risk of damage to humidity sender.


♦ The humidity sender -arrow- is very sensitive and must not
be damaged.

– If the humidity sender is damaged -arrow-, the rain and light


sensor -1- must be renewed.
– Clean bonding surface on windscreen using lint-free cloth.
• Completely remove any remains of the silicone.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal, observing the following:

Note

Renew the silicone pad.

– Remove silicone pad -2- from sensor -3- without leaving any
residue.
– Clean bonding surface -1- on sensor with compressed air.

1. windscreen wiper system. 59


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Pull silicone paper -1- off silicone pad -3-.


– The transparent protective film -2- remains on the silicone pad
as an assembly aid.

– Using transparent protective film -1- position silicone pad -2-


in centre of sensor -3-.
– Press silicone pad through protective film onto sensor.

– Pull protective film -2- off silicone pad -1-.

Note

To prevent the silicone pad from being soiled, only remove the
protective film immediately before installing the sensor.

60 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Insert sensor -4- in mounting -2-.


– Press on retaining clips -1, 5- until they can be heard to en‐
gage.

Note

♦ Even if the sensor is installed correctly, small air bubbles may


initially appear between the windscreen and the coupling pad.
After approx. 10 minutes, the contact surface must be free of
bubbles.
♦ If the contact surface is not free of bubbles after 10 minutes,
the rain and light sensor - G397- must be removed and instal‐
led anew.
♦ Air bubbles between the windscreen and the coupling pad will
cause the rain and light sensor - G397- to malfunction.

– Connect electrical connector -3-.


– If the rain and light sensor - G397- was renewed, perform cod‐
ing.
Coding rain and light sensor - G397-
– Code rain and light sensor - G397- ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

1.8.2 Coding rain and light sensor - G397-


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

1. windscreen wiper system. 61


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2 Windscreen washer system

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011

2.1 Assembly overview - windscreen wash‐


er system

Note

One of two different types of reservoir is installed for the wind‐


screen and headlight washer system (either with or without head‐
light washer system), depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle. The illustration shows the version for vehicles with head‐
light washer system.

1 - Filler neck with connecting


pipe on reservoir for wind‐
screen and headlight washer
system
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 63
2 - Washer fluid reservoir
❑ Removing and installing
(vehicles with no head‐
light washer system)
⇒ page 63
❑ Removing and installing
(vehicles with headlight
washer system)
⇒ page 65
❑ Securing nuts and bolts
of windscreen and
headlight washer fluid
reservoir to body - 8 Nm
3 - Windscreen washer fluid
level sender - G33-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 68
4 - Windscreen and rear win‐
dow washer pump - V59-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 67
5 - Left windscreen washer
system spray jet
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 68
❑ Adjusting ⇒ page 69
6 - Right windscreen washer
system spray jet
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 68

62 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018
❑ Adjusting ⇒ page 69
❑ Overview of hose couplings for washer fluid lines ⇒ page 81
7 - Hose
❑ Hose repair ⇒ page 82
8 - Y-piece
❑ Distribution of wash water line to windscreen washer system spray jets

2.2 Removing and installing washer fluid


reservoir
The reservoir for windscreen and headlight washer system has
two parts and can be dismantled. In order to ensure the parts are
placed together correctly, check when assembling that the guides
of the individual parts engage in each other.
1 - Filler pipe with filler neck on reservoir for windscreen and
headlight washer system
2 - Washer fluid reservoir
One of two different types of reservoir is installed for the wind‐
screen and headlight washer system, depending on the equip‐
ment installed in the vehicle:
♦ Removing and installing reservoir for windscreen and head‐
light washer system (vehicles with headlight washer system)
⇒ page 63 .
♦ Removing and installing reservoir for windscreen and head‐
light washer system (vehicles without headlight washer sys‐
tem) ⇒ page 65 .

2.2.1 Removing and installing connecting


pipe with filler neck on windscreen and
headlight washer fluid reservoir
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Unclip connecting pipe -2- from bracket -1- and pull off from
support -arrow- on windscreen and headlight washer system
reservoir.
– Remove connecting pipe and filler neck from vehicle.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

The guide on the underside of the connecting pipe must align with
the lug on the reservoir support when fitting.

2.2.2 Removing and installing reservoir for


windscreen and headlight washer sys‐

2. Windscreen washer system 63


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

tem (vehicles without headlight washer


system)
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove filler pipe with filler neck on reservoir for windscreen
and headlight washer system ⇒ page 63 .
– Remove front bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 63 ; Front bumper .
– Remove left headlight: ⇒ page 83
– Remove front left wheel housing liner ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Wheel housing liner .

Note

The connections to the pump and hose lines are colour-coded in


order to prevent the washer fluid lines being incorrectly connected
to the front and rear washer fluid pump - V59- . The hose fittings
must be connected to the correct colour-coded pump connections
during installation.

– To release, twist securing clips on hose connections -3- and


-5- and pull off elbow connectors from windscreen and rear
window washer pump - V59- -4-.
– Collect any escaping washer fluid in a suitable container.
– Pull windscreen and rear window washer pump - V59- -4- up‐
wards out of rubber seal in reservoir and release and separate
connector -6-.
– Release and separate connector -2- of windscreen washer
fluid level sender - G33- -1-.
– Follow route of wiring harness and unclip from retainers on
reservoir.

– Remove securing bolt -1-.

64 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove securing bolt -1-.

– Unscrew securing nut -1- and remove reservoir -2-.


Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Tighten all threaded connections to torque specified in as‐
sembly overview ⇒ page 62 .
– On completion of installation work, bleed headlight washer
system ⇒ page 80 .

2.2.3 Removing and installing reservoir for


windscreen and headlight washer sys‐
tem (vehicles with headlight washer sys‐
tem)

Note

Depending on the equipment level, the positions of the individual


components could be slightly different to those shown in the il‐
lustrations. Removal procedure is analogue.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove filler pipe with filler neck on reservoir for windscreen
and headlight washer system ⇒ page 63 .
– Remove front bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 63 ; Front bumper .
– Remove left headlight: ⇒ page 83
– Remove front left wheel housing liner ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Wheel housing liner .

Note

The connections to the pump and hose lines are colour-coded in


order to prevent the washer fluid lines being incorrectly connected
to the front and rear washer fluid pump - V59- . The hose fittings
must be connected to the correct colour-coded pump connections
during installation.

2. Windscreen washer system 65


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– To release, twist securing clips on hose connections -3-, -6-


and -9- and pull off elbow connectors from windscreen and
rear window washer pump - V59- -7- and headlight washer
pump - V11- -2-.
– If necessary, collect any escaping washer fluid in a suitable
container.
– Pull windscreen and rear window washer pump - V59- -7- up‐
wards out of rubber seal in reservoir, and release and discon‐
nect connector -8-.
– Release and disconnect connector -5- of windscreen washer
fluid level sender - G33- -4-.
– Follow route of wiring connector -1- and unclip from reservoir.
– Pull headlight washer system pump - V11- -2- upwards out of
rubber seal in reservoir and release and separate connector
-1-.
– Follow route of wiring harness and unclip from retainers on
reservoir.

– Remove securing bolt -1-.

– Remove securing bolt -1-.

– Unscrew securing nut -1-.

66 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Unscrew securing nut -1- and remove reservoir -2-.


Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Tighten all threaded connections to torque specified in as‐
sembly overview ⇒ page 62 .
– On completion of installation work, bleed headlight washer
system ⇒ page 80 .

2.3 Removing and installing windscreen


and rear window washer pump - V59-

Note

One of two different types of reservoir is installed for the wind‐


screen and headlight washer system (either with or without head‐
light washer system), depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle. The illustration shows the version for vehicles with head‐
light washer system.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front left wheel housing liner ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Wheel housing liner .

Note

The connections to the pump and hose lines are colour-coded in


order to prevent the washer fluid lines being incorrectly connected
to the front and rear washer fluid pump - V59- . The hose fittings
must be connected to the correct colour-coded pump connections
during installation.

– To release, twist securing clips on hose connections -6- and


-9-, and pull elbow connectors off windscreen and rear window
washer pump - V59- -7-.
– Pull windscreen and rear window washer pump - V59- -7- up‐
wards out of rubber seal in reservoir, and release and discon‐
nect connector -8-.
– Collect escaping fluid in a suitable container.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– On completion of installation work, bleed headlight washer
system ⇒ page 80 .

2. Windscreen washer system 67


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2.4 Removing and installing windscreen


washer fluid level sender - G33-

Note

One of two different types of reservoir is installed for the wind‐


screen and headlight washer system (either with or without head‐
light washer system), depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle. The illustration shows the version for vehicles with head‐
light washer system.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front left wheel housing liner ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Wheel housing liner .
– Release and separate connector -5- on windscreen washer
fluid level sender - G33- -4-.
– Pull windscreen washer fluid level sender - G33- -4- out of its
rubber seal.
– Collect escaping fluid in a suitable container.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– On completion of installation work, bleed headlight washer
system ⇒ page 80 .

2.5 Removing and installing windscreen


washer system spray jets
Removing:
– Push spray jet upwards -arrow A- and swing out of flap down‐
wards -arrow B-.

68 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release hose clip -1- in -direction of arrow- and pull hose con‐
nection -2- off spray jet.
– Release and separate connector -3- and remove spray jet
-4-.
Installing:
– Fit connector -2- and hose -1- onto spray jet.
– Starting from top, insert spray jet in mounting hole until it locks
in place audibly.
– Adjusting spray jets ⇒ page 69 .

2.6 Adjusting windscreen washer system


spray jets

Note

If impurities in the spray jet cause an uneven spray field, remove


the spray jet and flush through with water against the spraying
direction. Subsequent blowing through with compressed air
against the spraying direction is permitted. Never use solid ob‐
jects to clean the washer jets!

Adjusting windscreen washer system spray jets in “Maintenance


Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work

2. Windscreen washer system 69


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3 Rear window wiper system

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

3.1 Assembly overview - rear window wiper system

1 - Cover
2 - Securing nut
❑ 12 Nm
3 - Wiper arm
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 71
❑ Adjusting park position
⇒ page 72
4 - Seal
❑ In rear window
5 - Rear window wiper motor -
V12-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 71
6 - M6 securing nut with wash‐
er
❑ 8 Nm
7 - Rubber ring
8 - Distance piece
9 - Joint-free wiper
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 73

70 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.2 Removing and installing wiper arm

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-
Removing:
– Allow rear window wiper to adopt park position.
– Fold cover cap -1- of rear window wiper up and unclip it.
– Loosen but do not completely remove securing nut -arrow-.
– Fold wiper arm up and release from taper by rocking arm back
and forth sideways.
– Unscrew securing nut -arrow- completely and remove wiper
arm.
Installing:
– To move wiper motor to its rest position, switch windscreen
wipers on and off with ignition on.

– Fit wiper arm in approximate park position on wiper arm shaft


and tighten securing nut -arrow- by hand .

Note

Wiper arm securing nut -arrow- is not tightened to specified torque


until wiper blade park position has been adjusted.

– Adjust rear window wiper park position ⇒ page 72 .

3.3 Removing and installing rear window


wiper motor - V12-

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

3. Rear window wiper system 71


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove lower trim on rear lid ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 70 ; Rear lid trim .
– Release connector -1- and disconnect.
– Remove securing nuts -arrows-.
– Carefully pull rear window wiper motor inwards off rear lid.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Before installing rear wiper motor, moisten inner side of rear
window rubber seal with a rubber and plastic compatible lu‐
bricant (e.g. polyethylene glycol).

– Check seal is seated correctly in opening of rear window. Mark


-1- on seal must align with mark -2- on rear window.
– Connect battery ⇒ page 4 .

3.4 Adjusting rear window wiper park posi‐


tion

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-
Distance -a- between wiper rubber and lower edge of window
must be 25 mm.
– Adjust rear wiper park position by moving wiper arm on wiper
motor shaft if necessary.
Removing and installing wiper arm ⇒ page 71
– Tighten threaded connection to torque specified in assembly
overview ⇒ page 70 .

72 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.5 Removing and installing joint-free wiper


Removing:

Note

Joint-free wipers are very flexible. To lift the wiper blade off the
rear window, grasp it only in the area in which the wiper blade is
attached to the wiper.

– Lift up wiper arm.


– Swivel wiper blade in -direction of arrow A-.
– Press release button -2- and pull out wiper blade on wiper
blade mounting -1- in -direction of arrow B- from wiper arm.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

3. Rear window wiper system 73


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

4 Rear window washer system

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions

4.1 Assembly overview - rear window washer system

1 - Spray jet for rear window


washer system
❑ In high-level brake light
❑ Renewing spray jet
⇒ page 75
❑ Adjusting spray jet
⇒ page 75
2 - Hose
❑ Hose repair
⇒ page 82
3 - Filler pipe with filler neck on
reservoir for windscreen and
headlight washer system
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 63
4 - Washer fluid reservoir
❑ Removing and installing
(vehicles with no head‐
light washer system)
⇒ page 63
❑ Removing and installing
(vehicles with headlight
washer system)
⇒ page 65
5 - Windscreen washer fluid
level sender - G33-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 68
6 - Windscreen and rear win‐
dow washer pump - V59-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 67
❑ Overview of hose cou‐
plings for washer fluid
lines ⇒ page 81

74 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

4.2 Renewing and setting spray jet

4.2.1 Renewing spray jet


Spray jet is installed in high-level brake light - M25- .
Removing:
– Remove high-level brake light - M25- ⇒ page 135 .
– Release both catches -arrows- and pull spray jet -1- to rear out
of high-level brake light - M25- .
Installing:
– Install in reverse order of removal.
– Adjusting spray jet ⇒ page 75 .

4.2.2 Adjusting spray jet


Adjusting spray jet in “Maintenance Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ;
Booklet ; Description of work .

4. Rear window washer system 75


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

5 Headlight washer system

5.1 General description

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011


⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
⇒ Operating manual
General description:
Every first and then fifth time the windscreen washer system is
activated the headlights are also washed if the windscreen wiper
lever on the steering wheel is pulled for at least 1.5 seconds and
dipped beam or main beam are switched on.
The “active time” of the headlight washer system can be adjusted.
Following installation work or on initial start-up of the headlight
washer system, the system must be bled to ensure proper oper‐
ation of the pop-up cylinders and spray jets ⇒ page 80 .
Fault detection and fault display:
The onboard supply control unit - J519- is equipped with self-di‐
agnosis, which makes fault finding easier.
For fault finding, use vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system - VAS 5051A- in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

5.2 Assembly overview - headlight washer system

76 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Filler pipe with filler neck on


reservoir for windscreen and
headlight washer system
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 63
2 - Washer fluid reservoir
❑ Removing and installing
(vehicles with no head‐
light washer system)
⇒ page 63
❑ Removing and installing
(vehicles with headlight
washer system)
⇒ page 65
3 - Headlight washer system
pump - V11-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 77
4 - Windscreen washer fluid
level sender - G33-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 68
5 - Spray jet assembly with left
spray jets
❑ Removing and installing
spray jet assembly
⇒ page 79
❑ Adjusting spray jets
⇒ page 80
❑ Removing and installing
spray jet pop-up cylin‐
der ⇒ page 78
6 - T-piece
❑ Distribution of wash wa‐
ter line to headlight washer system spray jets
7 - Hose
❑ Hose repair ⇒ page 82
8 - Spray jet assembly with right spray jets
❑ Removing and installing spray jet assembly ⇒ page 79
❑ Adjusting spray jets ⇒ page 80
❑ Removing and installing spray jet pop-up cylinder ⇒ page 78

5.3 Removing and installing headlight


washer system pump - V11-
The headlight washer system pump - V11- is mounted on the
washer fluid reservoir in the right-hand wheel housing.

Note

Depending on equipment, the location of the headlight washer


system pump - V11- may deviate slightly from the illustration. Re‐
moval procedure is analogue.

5. Headlight washer system 77


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front left wheel housing liner ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Wheel housing liner .
– Follow route of wiring connector -1- and unclip from reservoir.
– To release, twist securing clip on hose connection -3- and pull
off elbow connector from headlight washer system pump -
V11- -2-.
– Collect escaping fluid in a suitable container.
– Pull headlight washer system pump - V11- -2- upwards out of
rubber seal in reservoir and release and separate connector
-1-.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– On completion of installation work, bleed headlight washer
system ⇒ page 80 .

5.4 Removing and installing spray jet pop-


up cylinders

Note

♦ Following illustrations show removal and installation of left


spray jet pop-up cylinder.
♦ Removal and installation of right spray jet pop-up cylinder are
carried out in the same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Pull spray jets together with cover cap -1- out of bumper cover
to stop.
– Unclip cover cap -1- at both sides on mounting points
-arrow- of spray jet holder.
– Remove front bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 63 ; Front bumper .

78 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Press securing clip -arrow- and pull off hose connection -1-
from pop-up cylinder.
– Collect escaping fluid in a suitable container.

– Push together locking mechanisms -1- at same time and pull


out pop-up cylinder -2- from mounting in bumper cover in
-direction of arrow-.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– On completion of installation work, bleed headlight washer
system ⇒ page 80 .

5.5 Removing and installing spray jet retain‐


er

Note

♦ Following illustrations show removal and installation of left


spray jet assembly.
♦ Removal and installation of right spray jet assembly are car‐
ried out in the same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Pull spray jet together with cover cap -1- out of bumper cover
to stop.
– Unclip cover cap -1- from mounting points -arrows- on spray
jet retainer.

5. Headlight washer system 79


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Lift up retaining hook -arrow- slightly and pull out washer jet
bracket.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

The degree to which the cover cap of the spray jet is pulled down
onto the bumper cover can be adjusted using the clips on the
spray jet assembly. If the spray jet assembly is not pulled in far
enough, the cover cap will not seat correctly. If the spray jet as‐
sembly is pulled in too far, the cover cap and the bumper cover
could be pushed out of shape.

– Insert spray jet holder in pop-up cylinder until it engages.


– Fit cover cap on spray jet holder and allow to engage in pop-
up cylinder.
– Check that cover cap is correctly seated on bumper cover.
– If necessary, adjust seat of cover cap by pushing spray jet
assembly in higher or lower position on pop-up cylinder.
– On completion of installation work, bleed headlight washer
system ⇒ page 80 .
– Check headlight washer system spray jets and adjust if nec‐
essary ⇒ page 80 .

5.6 Adjusting headlight washer system


spray jets
Adjusting spray jets for headlight washer system in “Maintenance
Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

5.7 Bleeding headlight washer system


To guarantee sound functioning of pop-up cylinders and spray
jets, the headlight washer system must be bled following assem‐
bly work or when operated for the first time.
– Replenish washer fluid reservoir.
– Start engine.
– Switch headlights “ON”.
– Operate headlight washer system several times (3-5 times, 3
seconds each time).
– Repeat this bleeding procedure until the pop-up cylinders and
spray jets are functioning soundly.

80 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

6 Washer fluid line hose couplings


⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep. gr. 92 ; Washer
fluid line hose couplings

6. Washer fluid line hose couplings 81


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

7 Hose repair
⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep. gr. 92 ; Hose
repair

82 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

94 – Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


1 Operation and safety notes for gas
discharge lamps

WARNING

♦ Never change bulbs if you are not familiar with the appro‐
priate procedures, safety precautions and tools.

– If repairs are to be made to the headlights with gas discharge


bulbs, observe the following:
♦ Notes on dangerous high voltage/currents ⇒ page 83
♦ Notes on pressure, temperature, radiation/arcs ⇒ page 84
♦ Assembly notes for gas discharge bulbs ⇒ page 85
♦ Disposal regulations for gas discharge bulbs ⇒ page 85
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Safety goggles
♦ Gloves
Notes on dangerous high voltage and current

WARNING

Control units for light systems, connectors and components


pertaining to bulb holders conduct lethally high voltage.
Operating the control unit and the starter unit is permitted only
with the bulb fitted.

WARNING

• Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers and re‐


move ignition key.
• When working on headlight system, ensure that there is
no voltage in any components, including the dissipation of
residual voltage after the headlights are switched off.
• Residual voltage can be dissipated by turning the dipped
beams on and then off again after withdrawing the ignition
key.
• When working on the headlight system, ensure that the
lights cannot be switched on.

1. Operation and safety notes for gas discharge lamps 83


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Notes on pressure, temperature, radiation/arcs

WARNING

♦ Within the glass bulb of a gas discharge bulb, pressure


can range from between 7 bar (cold) and 100 bar (hot).
Temperatures can reach up to 700 degrees Celsius on the
glass bulb.
♦ Should the glass bulb explode, there is a risk of injury from
burning.
♦ Always wear eye protection and gloves when removing
and installing gas discharge lamps!

WARNING

• The bulbs may be operated in the headlight housing only


(protection against contact due to very hot bulbs, absorp‐
tion of UV radiation, avoidance of dazzling light, protection
against explosion).
• The glass of the bulbs can become very hot - danger of
burns!
• Avoid looking directly into the beam, as the UV rays from
the gas discharge bulb are about 2.5 times greater than
normal halogen bulbs.
• Avoid looking into the light beam (danger of glare); vision
may be impaired for a substantial time.

WARNING

• Avoid contact with burst glass part of the bulbs.


• H7 bulbs and gas discharge bulbs (xenon and bi-xenon)
are under pressure and can explode while being changed
- danger of injury.
• Always wear eye protection and gloves when removing
and installing gas discharge lamps!

84 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Assembly notes for gas discharge bulbs

Caution

♦ Always switch off the affected consumers before exchang‐


ing a bulb.
♦ Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
♦ Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with bare fingers;
use clean cloth gloves. When the light bulb is switched on,
the heat would vaporise the oil of the finger prints which
would then settle on the reflector, impairing the brightness
of the headlight.
♦ A light bulb must always be renewed with a bulb of the
same sort. The designation appears on the base of the
bulb or on the bulb glass.
♦ Properly engage connectors during installation and the
connection is seated tightly.

Disposal regulations for gas discharge bulbs

WARNING

• Gas discharge bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous


waste; never dispose of gas discharge bulbs as consumer
waste.
• Gas discharge bulbs contain metallic mercury (Hg) and
traces of thallium; never destroy these bulbs.
• These components must be recycled in the correct man‐
ner according to national law.
• Only dispose of in containers intended for this purpose at
an authorised collection point.

1. Operation and safety notes for gas discharge lamps 85


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2 Headlights with gas discharge bulbs


and cornering lights

2.1 General description

WARNING

Observe operating and safety notes for gas discharge bulbs


⇒ page 83 .

Note

♦ Before working on headlight with gas discharge lights and


corning lights, always switch off the headlights and move the
ignition key to position 0 (locked).
♦ The automatic headlight range control and cornering lights on
headlights with gas discharge bulbs is equipped with self-di‐
agnosis.
♦ When dealing with complaints, it is absolutely essential that
the function and operation of the lighting system are first un‐
derstood.
♦ Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
Self-study programme ⇒ Self-study programme No. 335 ; The
Cornering Light System
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
General description:
The headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights
(AFS = Adaptive Front Lighting System) have a “bi-xenon” func‐
tion.
With conventional “xenon” headlights, the gas discharge bulb only
generates the dipped beam. The “bi-xenon” features makes it
possible to generate both the dipped beam and the main beam
with “one” gas discharge bulb. To achieve this, an electrome‐
chanical adjuster ( left dip beam screen motor - V294- or right dip
beam screen motor - V295- ) uncovers the screened area of the
dipped beam on actuation of the main beam function, thus pro‐
ducing main beam light distribution.
This means that with “bi-xenon” headlights the main beam is al‐
ways automatically adjusted together with the dipped beam.
The headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights do
not have an “additional main beam”.
Fault detection and fault display:
The automatic headlight range control, the cornering lights and
onboard supply control systems feature self-diagnosis to facilitate
fault finding for headlights with gas discharge bulbs.
Fault finding ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Find-
ing .

86 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Note

The “bulb failure” warning lamp in the dash panel lights up when
the headlight range control or the VARILIS headlight (adaptive
front lighting system) malfunctions.

2.2 Assembly overview - headlights with


gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights

Note

After measures that could influence the headlight setting, check


the headlight setting and correct it, if necessary ⇒ Maintenance ;
Booklet ; Work descriptions .

1 - Cover
2 - Cover
3 - Left static cornering light -
M51- or right static cornering
light - M52-
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 91
4 - Left gas discharge bulb -
L13- or right gas discharge
bulb - L14- (“bi-xenon”)
❑ Type D3S, 35W
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 89
5 - Left headlight range control
motor - V48- or right headlight
range control motor - V49-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 93
6 - Bolt
❑ 4.5 Nm
7 - Spacer
8 - Headlights
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 102
❑ Correcting installation
position of headlight
⇒ page 103
❑ Converting headlights
to drive on the left or the
right ⇒ page 98
❑ Perform basic setting
⇒ Maintenance ; Book‐
let ; Work descriptions .
9 - Cornering light and head‐
light range control unit - J745-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 97
❑ Coding ⇒ page 98

2. Headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights 87


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Note

If the control unit for cornering light


and headlight range control - J745-
has to be coded, basic setting of the
headlights must be performed after
coding ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ;
Descriptions of work .

10 - Securing bolts
❑ 2 Nm
11 - Control unit for left gas discharge bulb - J343- or control unit for right gas discharge bulb - J344-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 96
12 - Securing bolts
❑ 2 Nm
13 - Securing bolts
❑ 2 Nm
14 - Output module for left headlight - J667- or output module for right headlight - J668-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 95

Note

After a new output module for head‐


lights has been installed, the corner‐
ing light and headlight range control
unit - J745- must be coded
⇒ page 98 . Subsequently, basic
setting of the headlights needs to be
performed ⇒ Maintenance ; Book‐
let ; Descriptions of work .

15 - Vehicle level sender


❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 98
16 - Front left turn signal bulb - M5- or front right turn signal bulb - M7-
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 91
17 - Adapter
18 - Securing bolts
❑ M6 x 22
❑ 5 Nm

2.3 Removing and installing headlight


Headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering light are re‐
moved and installed in the same way as halogen headlights.
– Removing and installing headlights ⇒ page 102 .

2.4 Adjusting headlight installation position


The installation position of headlights with gas discharge bulbs
and cornering light is corrected in the same way as that of halogen
headlights.
– Adjusting headlight installation position ⇒ page 103

88 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2.5 Renewing gas discharge bulbs and cor‐


nering light bulbs in headlights

2.5.1 Renewing gas discharge bulb

WARNING

Observe operation and safety notes for gas discharge bulbs


⇒ page 83 .

Note

♦ The left gas discharge bulb - L13- and the right gas discharge
bulb - L14- can be checked by the final control diagnosis for
the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
♦ The illustrations show how to replace the right gas discharge
bulb - L14- .
♦ The left gas discharge bulb - L13- is replaced in the same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers and move ig‐
nition key to position 0 (locked).
– Remove headlight ⇒ page 102
– Remove cap -2-.

2. Headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights 89


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Unfasten connector -2- and disconnect.

WARNING

♦ Within the glass bulb of a gas discharge bulb, pressure


can range from between 7 bar (cold) and 100 bar (hot).
Temperatures can reach up to 700 degrees Celsius on the
glass bulb.
♦ Should the glass bulb explode, there is a risk of injury from
burning.
♦ Always wear eye protection and gloves when removing
and installing gas discharge lamps!

– Turn gas discharge bulb -1- towards left to stop.


– Pull gas discharge bulb in a straight line towards rear out of
reflector.
Gas discharge bulb : type D3S, 35W.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Note

♦ Do not touch bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers leave


traces of grease on the glass, which evaporate when the gas
discharge bulb is switched on and cause the glass to cloud
over.
♦ Do not expose glass of gas discharge bulb to mechanical
stress of any kind. The glass part of the bulb is extremely sen‐
sitive and is also under a high internal pressure.
♦ Avoid looking directly into the collimated beam as the UV ra‐
diation from the gas discharge bulb is about 2.5 times higher
than from normal halogen bulbs.
♦ Make sure cover seal is correctly seated when installing the
cap. The ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the
headlight.
♦ If a headlight with automatic range control is removed, the ba‐
sic setting of the headlights is always to be performed after
installation ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

Note

When inserting gas discharge bulb, make sure that the mounting
clasps on the reflector do not become bent.

– Insert the new gas discharge bulb and lock it in place.


– Attach connector.
– Fit covering cap and secure with the two wire clips.
– Check functions of headlight.
– Check headlight adjustment, and adjust headlight if necessary
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

90 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2.5.2 Renewing static cornering lights -M51- /


-M52-
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers.
– Disengage ignition key in position 0 (locked).
– Detach cap -1-.
– Starting at top, swing static cornering light -M51- / -M52- -2-
out of reflector.
– Remove static cornering light -M51- / -M52- from headlight.

– Pull bulb for static cornering light -M51- / -M52- -2- in a straight
line in -direction of arrow- out of bulb holder -1-.

2.5.3 Renewing side light bulb


In headlights with gas discharge bulbs, the LEDs for the daytime
driving lights perform the function of the side light. The LEDs for
daytime running lights cannot be removed.

2.5.4 Renewing turn signal bulb

Note

♦ Front left turn signal bulb - M5- and front right turn signal bulb
- M7- can be checked by the final control diagnosis for the
onboard power supply control unit - J519- .
♦ The diagrams show renewal of the front right turn signal bulb
- M7- .
♦ The renewal of the front left turn signal bulb - M5- is carried
out in the same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers and move ig‐
nition key to position 0 (locked).

2. Headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights 91


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Pull cap -1- off headlight housing.

– Turn grip anti-clockwise -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove


it together with the turn signal bulb from the headlight.

– Press button -arrow- on grip and pull turn signal bulb -1-
straight out at the front.
Front turn signal bulb : 12 V, PSY24W SV
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Note

Make sure cover seal is correctly seated when installing the cap.
The ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the head‐
light.

2.6 Headlight range control motor

Note

Left headlight range control motor - V48- and right headlight range
control motor - V49- can be checked by final control diagnosis for
cornering light and headlight range control unit - J745- .

92 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2.6.1 Removing and installing headlight range


control motor

Note

♦ The following illustrations show how to replace the right head‐


light range control motor - V49- .
♦ The left headlight range control motor - V48- is replaced in the
same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers and move ig‐
nition key to position 0 (locked).
– Remove headlight ⇒ page 102 .
– Press wire clip -1- outwards and remove covering cap -2-.

– Pull regulator -1- downwards out of headlight housing.

– Pull off connector -1-.


– Turn headlight range control motor -2- anti-clockwise in
-direction of arrow- as far as it will go.

2. Headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights 93


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Swing ball head of actuator -1- downwards out of the mounting


on the reflector -2-.
– Remove headlight range control motor.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

– Insert headlight range control motor into the headlight housing


and swing ball head of headlight range control motor -1- into
mounting on reflector -2- from below, while pulling the reflector
towards the rear.
– Insert the actuator into its mounting and lock it in place by
turning it clockwise as far as it will go.

Note

♦ Make sure cover seal is correctly seated when installing the


cap. The ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the
headlight.
♦ If a headlight with automatic range control is removed, the ba‐
sic setting of the headlights is always to be performed after
installation ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

2.7 Headlight holder

2.7.1 Removing and installing headlight hold‐


er

Note

♦ The following illustrations show how to remove the right head‐


light.
♦ Removal and installation of the left headlight are carried out in
the same way.

Removing:
– Remove headlight ⇒ page 102 .
– Undo bolt -1- of washing fluid reservoir.
– Detach headlight holder -2- from its locking mechanism
-arrow- pull it laterally off support plate in -direction of arrow-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

94 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– When tightening bolt, make sure that the threaded sleeve for
fastening the headlight is horizontal.
– Tighten securing bolt -1- to 8 Nm.

2.8 Dynamic cornering light control motor

Note

The left dynamic bend lighting actuator - V318- and the right dy‐
namic bend lighting actuator - V319- can be checked by the final
control diagnosis for the control unit for bend lighting and head‐
light range control - J745- .

The left dynamic cornering light actuator - V318- or right dynamic


cornering light actuator - V319- are located inside the respective
headlight and must not be dismantled.
In the event of damage, the headlight must be renewed
⇒ page 102 .

2.9 Swivel module position sensor


The left swivel module position sensor - G474- or right swivel
module position sensor - G475- are located inside the respective
headlight and can neither be individually renewed nor adjusted.
In the event of damage, the headlight must be renewed
⇒ page 102 .

2.10 Power output module for headlight

2.10.1 Removing and installing output module


for headlights

Note

♦ The illustrations show how to replace the right power module


for the headlight - J668- .
♦ Replacement of the power module for left headlight - J667- is
analogous.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers and move ig‐
nition key to position 0 (locked).
– Remove headlight ⇒ page 102 .

2. Headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights 95


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove securing bolts -arrows-.


– Pull the power module -1- straight upwards off the headlight
housing.

Note

The electrical connector for the headlight power module is de‐


tached at the same time when the power module is pulled off the
headlight housing.

Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Caution

Make sure cover seal is correctly seated when installing the


headlight power module. The ingress of water will cause per‐
manent damage to the headlight.

Note

After a new output module for headlights has been installed, the
cornering light and headlight range control unit - J745- must be
coded ⇒ page 98 . Subsequently, basic setting of the headlights
needs to be performed ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions
of work .

– Check functions of headlight.


– Check headlight adjustment, and adjust headlight if necessary
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

2.11 Gas discharge bulb control unit

Note

The left gas discharge bulb control unit - J343- or right gas dis‐
charge bulb control unit - J344- is not capable of self-diagnosis.

2.11.1 Removing and installing gas discharge


bulb control unit

Note

♦ The illustrations show how to replace the right gas discharge


bulb control unit - J344- .
♦ Replacement of the left gas discharge bulb control unit - J343-
is analogous.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers and move ig‐
nition key to position 0 (locked).
– Remove headlight ⇒ page 102 .

96 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove securing bolts -arrows-.


– Pull gas discharge bulb control unit -1- straight upwards off the
headlight housing, taking connected wiring lengths into con‐
sideration.

– Release and detach connector -arrows- and remove gas dis‐


charge bulb control unit -1-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Caution

Make sure cover seal is correctly seated when installing the


gas discharge bulb control unit. The ingress of water will cause
permanent damage to the headlight.

– Check functions of headlight.


– Check headlight adjustment, and adjust headlight if necessary
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

2.12 Cornering light and headlight range con‐


trol unit - J745-

2.12.1 Removing and installing cornering light


and headlight range control unit - J745-
– Remove glove compartment ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trims; Removing and
installing glove compartment .
– Swing locking mechanism in direction of -arrow- and detach
connector -1- from cornering light and headlight range control
unit - J745- -2-.

2. Headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights 97


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Undo bolts -arrows- and remove cornering light and headlight


range control unit - J745- -1-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Note

The new cornering light and headlight range control unit must be
coded after installation ⇒ page 98 . Subsequently, basic setting
of the headlights needs to be performed ⇒ Maintenance ; Book‐
let ; Descriptions of work .

– Check headlight functions.


– Check headlight setting and adjust headlight if necessary
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

2.12.2 Coding cornering light and headlight


range control unit - J745-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

Note

If the cornering light and headlight range control unit - J745- has
to be coded, basic setting of the headlights must be performed
after coding ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

2.13 Vehicle level sender


Removing and installing vehicle level senders :
Removing and installing vehicle level sender: ⇒ Running gear,
axles, steering; Rep. gr. 40 or ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering;
Rep. gr. 42

Note

If the vehicle level senders are renewed, basic setting of the


headlights must be performed ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; De‐
scription of work .

2.14 Repairing headlight retaining tabs


If one or more headlight retaining tabs are damaged or broken
off, they can be renewed by installing the repair kit. There is no
need to renew the entire headlight.
Repairing headlight retaining tabs for headlights with gas dis‐
charge bulbs and cornering lights is carried out in the same
manner as for conventional headlights ⇒ page 114 .

2.15 Converting headlights for use when driv‐


ing on the left or right

Note

Additional information:

98 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

⇒ Operating manual
The headlights have to be modified for driving in countries where
cars must be driven on the other side of the road. Retrofitting
headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lighting is car‐
ried out by means of the combi-instrument menu:
– Select “Settings” menu option in dash panel insert
– Activate the checkmark in the “Travel mode” checkbox.
If the checkmark has been activated, the headlights of a left-hand
drive vehicle change over for driving on the left and the headlights
of a right-hand drive vehicle change over for driving on the right.
It is only permissible to use the Travel mode for a short time.

2.16 Adjusting headlights


– Adjusting headlights with gas discharge bulbs ⇒ Mainte‐
nance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

2. Headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights 99


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3 Headlight with halogen bulbs

3.1 General description

Note

♦ Before working on headlights, always switch off the headlights


and remove the ignition key.
♦ When dealing with complaints, it is absolutely essential that
the function and operation of the lighting system are first un‐
derstood.
♦ Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011
Fault detection and fault display:
The onboard supply control unit has a self-diagnostic function,
which makes fault finding on headlights easier.
For fault finding, use vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system - VAS 5051A- in “Guided fault finding” mode.

3.2 Assembly overview - headlights with halogen bulbs

100 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Cover
2 - Cover
3 - Cover
4 - Left headlight range control
motor - V48- or right headlight
range control motor - V49-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 112
5 - Bulb holder with grip ele‐
ment
❑ For left headlight dipped
beam bulb - M29- or
right headlight dipped
beam bulb - M31-
6 - Left headlight dipped beam
bulb - M29- or right headlight
dipped beam bulb - M31-
❑ Bulb H7 12V, 55W
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 105
7 - Left daytime running light
bulb - L174- or right daytime
running light bulb - L175-
❑ Bulb 12V, P21W
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 110
8 - Headlights
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 102
❑ Correcting installation
position of headlight
⇒ page 103
❑ Repairing headlight re‐
taining tabs
⇒ page 114
❑ Converting headlights to drive on the left or the right ⇒ page 116
9 - Securing bolts
❑ M6 x 20
❑ 5 Nm
10 - Front-end support element (sheet metal cross member)
11 - Left headlight main beam bulb - M30- or right headlight main beam bulb - M32-
❑ Bulb: 12V, 55W
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 106
12 - Left side-light bulb - M1- or right side-light bulb - M3-
❑ Bulb 12-V, W5W
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 108
13 - Front left turn signal bulb - M5- or front right turn signal bulb - M7-
❑ Bulb 12 V PSY 24 W SV
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 109
14 - Bulb holder with grip element
❑ For front left turn signal bulb - M5- or front right turn signal bulb - M7-
15 - Bulb holder with grip element
❑ For left main beam headlight bulb - M30- or right main beam headlight bulb - M32-

3. Headlight with halogen bulbs 101


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.3 Removing and installing headlights with


halogen bulbs

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-
Removing:

Note

♦ There is no requirement to disconnect the battery earth strap.


♦ Illustrations show removal and installation of the left headlight.
Removal and installation of the right headlight are carried out
in the same way.
♦ If a headlight is removed, it should always be adjusted follow‐
ing reinstallation: “Maintenance Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ;
Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove radiator grille ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 66 ; Front bumper .
– Release connector -arrow- on rear of headlight and discon‐
nect.

– Unscrew total of six securing bolts -arrows-.


– Detach cable (secured with clips) for bonnet release and re‐
move sheet metal cross member -1-.

102 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Loosen front setting screw -arrow-.


s

– Loosen rear setting screw -arrow- and remove headlight for‐


wards out of body aperture.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– Tighten securing screws on headlight to torque specified in
assembly overview ⇒ page 100 .
– Check installation position so that shut lines/gaps around
headlight are even.
If the shut lines/gaps around the headlight are uneven, the instal‐
lation position must be adjusted ⇒ page 103 .
– Check functions of headlight.
– Check headlight adjustment, and adjust headlights if neces‐
sary: ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

3.4 Adjusting headlight installation position

Note

♦ If uneven gaps between body and headlight are encountered


when checking the installation position of the headlight, the
installation position must be corrected.
♦ To adjust the installation position of the headlight, the front
bumper does not have to be removed.
♦ The illustrations show the left headlight. Correcting the instal‐
lation position on the right-hand side is basically the same.

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove radiator grille ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 66 ; Radiator grille .

3. Headlight with halogen bulbs 103


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Unscrew total of six securing bolts -arrows-.


– Detach cable (secured with clips) for bonnet release and re‐
move sheet metal cross member -1-.

– Loosen front setting screw -arrow-.

– Loosen rear setting screw -arrow-.

104 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Adjust shut lines/gaps to body by pushing in or pulling out


alignment bushes -arrow- on headlight mounting.
– Reinstall sheet metal cross member and clip in bonnet release
cable.
– Tighten threaded connections to torque specified in assembly
overview ⇒ page 100 .
– Check headlight installation position again to ensure gaps are
even; correct if necessary.
– Removing and installing radiator grille ⇒ General body re‐
pairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Mouldings and trims; Removing
and installing radiator grille
– Check functions of headlight.

Note

If a headlight is removed or adjusted to fit more accurately to the


vehicle body, it must be aligned following such measures.

– Check headlight adjustment and correct if necessary in “Main‐


tenance Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of
work .

3.5 Renewing headlight bulbs

3.5.1 Renewing headlight dipped beam bulb

Note

♦ For reasons of clarity, the headlights are shown removed in


the following illustrations.
♦ To renew left dipped beam headlight bulb - M29- or right dip‐
ped beam headlight bulb - M31- the headlight need not be
removed.
♦ The illustrations show the renewal of the left headlight dipped
beam bulb .
♦ The renewal of the headlight dipped beam bulb for the right
headlight is carried out in the same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Pull cap -1- off headlight housing.

3. Headlight with halogen bulbs 105


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Turn holder -1- together with dipped beam headlight bulb in


-direction of arrow- and remove from headlight.

– Pull dipped beam headlight bulb -1- straight in


-direction of arrow- out of holder -1-.
Headlight dipped beam bulb : 12 V, 55 W
Installing:

Caution

When installing cover cap, ensure cap is seated correctly. The


ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the headlight.

Note

Do not touch bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers leave


traces of grease on the glass, which evaporate when the bulb is
switched on and cause the glass to cloud over.

– Check functions of headlight.


– Check headlight adjustment and correct if necessary in “Main‐
tenance Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of
work .

3.5.2 Renewing headlight main beam bulb

Note

♦ For reasons of clarity, the headlights are shown removed in


the following illustrations.
♦ To renew left main beam headlight bulb - M30- or right main
beam headlight bulb - M32- the headlight need not be re‐
moved.
♦ The diagrams show the renewal of the left headlight main
beam bulb .
♦ Renewal of the main beam headlight bulb in the right headlight
is carried out in basically the same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

106 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Pull cap -2- off headlight housing.

– Hold connector -1- and together with main beam headlight


bulb carefully pull out backwards from reflector by canting
slightly.

– Pull out main beam headlight bulb -2- straight from connector
-1-
Main beam headlight bulb : 12V, 55W
Installing:

Caution

When installing cover cap, ensure cap is seated correctly. The


ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the headlight.

Note

Do not touch bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers leave


traces of grease on the glass, which evaporate when the bulb is
switched on and cause the glass to cloud over.

Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐


serve the following:
– Check functions of headlight.
– Check headlight adjustment, and adjust headlight if necessary
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 38 .

3. Headlight with halogen bulbs 107


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.5.3 Renewing side light bulb

Note

♦ For reasons of clarity, the headlights are shown removed in


the following illustrations.
♦ To renew left side light bulb - M1- or right side light bulb - M3-
the headlight need not be removed.
♦ The illustrations show the renewal of the side light bulb for the
left headlight.
♦ The renewal of the side light bulb for the right headlight is car‐
ried out in the same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Pull cap -2- off headlight housing.

– Pull out bulb holder -1- together with side light bulb backwards
from reflector, taking connected wiring length into account.

108 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Pull out side light bulb -2- in -direction of arrow- straight from
bulb holder -1-.
Side light bulb : glass-base bulb 12 V, 5 W
Installing:

Caution

When installing cover cap, ensure cap is seated correctly. The


ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the headlight.

Note

Do not touch bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers leave


traces of grease on the glass, which evaporate when the bulb is
switched on and cause the glass to cloud over.

Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐


serve the following:
– Check functions of headlight.

3.5.4 Renewing front turn signal bulb

Note

♦ For reasons of clarity, the headlights are shown removed in


the following illustrations.
♦ To renew front left turn signal bulb - M5- or front right turn
signal bulb - M7- the headlight need not be removed.
♦ The illustrations show the renewal of the front turn signal bulb
for the left headlight.
♦ The renewal of the front turn signal bulb for the right headlight
is carried out in the same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Turn holder -1- in -direction of arrow- and pull out backwards
from headlight housing.

3. Headlight with halogen bulbs 109


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Push front turn signal bulb -2- lightly into holder and, at the
same time, turn onto stop in -direction of arrow-. Then pull out
of holder -1-.
Front turn signal bulb : 12V, PY 21W
Installing:

Caution

When installing cover cap, ensure cap is seated correctly. The


ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the headlight.

Note

Do not touch bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers leave


traces of grease on the glass, which evaporate when the bulb is
switched on and cause the glass to cloud over.

Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐


serve the following:
– Check functions of headlight.

3.5.5 Renewing day driving light bulb

Note

♦ For reasons of clarity, the headlights are shown removed in


the following illustrations.
♦ To renew left day driving light bulb - L174- or right day driving
light bulb - L175- the headlight need not be removed.
♦ The illustrations show renewal of the day driving light bulb on
the left headlight.
♦ Renewal of the day driving light bulb in the right headlight is
carried out in basically the same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Pull cap -3- off headlight housing.

110 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Turn bulb holder -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove it to‐


gether with the left day driving light bulb from the headlight
housing.

– Push day driving light bulb -1- lightly into holder and, at the
same time, turn onto stop anti-clockwise. Then pull out of
holder -2-.
Daytime running light bulb : 12V, P21W
Installing:

Caution

When installing cover cap, ensure cap is seated correctly. The


ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the headlight.

Note

Do not touch bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers leave


traces of grease on the glass, which evaporate when the bulb is
switched on and cause the glass to cloud over.

Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐


serve the following:
– Check functions of headlight.
– Check headlight adjustment, and adjust headlight if necessary
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 38 .

3. Headlight with halogen bulbs 111


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.6 Headlight range control motor

3.6.1 Removing and installing headlight range


control motor
Removing:

Note

♦ If control motors are removed and reinstalled or renewed,


headlight adjustment must be checked and readjusted as nec‐
essary ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .
♦ The illustrations show the renewal of the headlight range con‐
trol motor for the left headlight.
♦ The renewal of the headlight range control motor for the right
headlight is carried out in the same way.
♦ To renew the servomotor, the headlight housing has to be cut
open and then sealed again with a screw-fitted cover cap from
the repair set ⇒ ETKA (Electronic parts catalogue) .

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove headlight ⇒ page 102 .
– Unscrew both securing bolts -arrows- and remove rear secur‐
ing tab -1- from headlight housing.
– Cut open headlight housing along dashed line (illustrated).

– Remove bolts -arrows-.


– Swing actuator -1- downwards and inwards out of mounting in
reflector.
– Pull actuator -1- to rear out of headlight housing, taking con‐
nected wiring lengths into consideration.

Note

We recommend pulling the rubber cap for the dip beam bulb off
the headlight housing to enable observation of the ball head when
disconnecting it from the mounting in the reflector.

112 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Disconnect connector -3- and actuator -2-.


Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

– Attach connector -3- and actuator -2- in headlight housing.


– Pull dip beam reflector towards ball head by hand and guide
ball head of actuator into mounting on reflector -1- from above.

– Secure actuator -1- using both securing screws -arrows-.

Caution

When installing, ensure that the screw-fitted cover cap from the
repair set is seated properly on the seal. The ingress of water
will cause permanent damage to the headlight.

– Seal headlight housing again using cover cap from repair kit.
– Check functions of headlight.
– Adjust headlights.
– Check headlight adjustment and correct if necessary in “Main‐
tenance Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of
work .

3. Headlight with halogen bulbs 113


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.7 Repairing headlight retaining tabs


If one or more headlight retaining tabs are damaged or broken
off, they can be renewed by installing the repair kit. There is no
need to renew the entire headlight.
Fitting locations overview of repair tabs
1- Repair tab at top (2x) ⇒ page 114 .
2- Repair tab on side ⇒ page 115 .
3- Repair tab at rear ⇒ page 115 .

Note

♦ Check that there is no further damage to the headlight that


would make installation of the repair kit unnecessary.
♦ Two different repair kits are available for the left and right
headlights ⇒ ETKA (electronic parts catalogue) .
♦ Each repair set contains one side tab, two top tabs and one
rear tab for securing the headlight, as well as the associated
securing screws.
♦ The following illustrations show the repair of the retaining tabs
on the left headlight. Repairs on the right headlight are carried
out in the same way.

3.7.1 Repairing upper retaining tab


Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque screwdriver - V.A.G 1624-

Note

♦ On the top of the headlight are two securing tabs.


♦ The following description is for one retaining tab.
♦ The repair of both retaining tabs follows the same sequence.

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove headlight ⇒ page 102 .

114 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove residue of old headlight retaining tab -1- as shown in


illustration.
– Fit new retaining tab -2- onto base of headlight, ensuring a
positive fit, and tighten screws -3- to 1.0 Nm.
– Install headlight ⇒ page 102 .
– Checking headlight adjustment and readjusting if necessary
in “Maintenance Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descrip‐
tion of work .

3.7.2 Repairing side retaining tab


Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque screwdriver - V.A.G 1624-

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove headlight ⇒ page 102 .
– Remove residue of old headlight retaining tab -1- as shown in
illustration.
– Fit new retaining tab -2- onto base of headlight, ensuring a
positive fit, and tighten screws -3- to 1.0 Nm.
– Install headlight ⇒ page 102 .
– Checking headlight adjustment and readjusting if necessary
in “Maintenance Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descrip‐
tion of work .

3.7.3 Repairing rear retaining tab


Special tools and workshop equipment required

3. Headlight with halogen bulbs 115


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Torque screwdriver - V.A.G 1624-

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove headlight ⇒ page 102 .
– Unscrew both securing bolts -arrows- and remove rear secur‐
ing tab -1- from headlight housing.
– Position new rear securing tab -2- on headlight housing and
tighten securing screws -3- to 1.0 Nm.
– Install headlight ⇒ page 102 .
– Checking headlight adjustment and readjusting if necessary
in “Maintenance Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descrip‐
tion of work .

3.8 Converting headlights for use when driv‐


ing on the left or right

Note

♦ To avoid dazzling oncoming traffic with the asymmetrical


lights, both headlights should be converted relevant to the
country (driving on the left or right) in which the vehicle is being
driven.
♦ Each headlight conversion set comprises 2 pieces of film.
♦ Conversion of the headlights is not designed as a permanent
conversion for other countries. It is only suitable as a “tourist
solution” for a short stay abroad.
♦ Both headlights of a vehicle must always be converted.
♦ The details “right” and “left” on the masking film always refer
to the direction of travel when looking forwards from inside the
vehicle.

116 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.8.1 Converting headlights designed for driv‐


ing on the right to driving on the left

Note

♦ The headlight conversion set comprises 2 pieces of film.


♦ Please note the different part numbers for the headlight con‐
version sets from right to left-hand traffic and from left to right-
hand traffic.
♦ Before converting the lenses, clean the headlights.

– Turn light switch to “0” position.


– Clean headlight lens.
Left headlight:
– Remove backing of application film -B- only in area marked
-C-.
– Align application film -B- with the outer edge to line -A- on the
headlight lens.
– Press area -C- firmly against headlight lens.
– Carefully pull application film -B- off headlight lens again.
– Masking film -C- remains on headlight lens.
Right headlight:

3. Headlight with halogen bulbs 117


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove backing of application film -B- only in area marked


-C-.
– Align application film -B- with the outer edge to line -A- on the
headlight lens.
– Press area -C- firmly against headlight lens.
– Carefully pull application film -B- off headlight lens again.
– Masking film -C- remains on headlight lens.

Caution

Risk of plastic erosion.


If using solvent-based cleaners, the plastic lens of the head‐
light could become damaged.
To remove any adhesive residue on the plastic headlight len‐
ses, use only alcohol-based cleaning agents or those with a
diluted alcohol mix (isopropanol).

Note

♦ Remove any adhesive residue using alcohol-based or diluted


alcohol-based cleaning fluids. For example a cloth soaked
with isopropyl alcohol.
♦ Inform customers how to remove adhesive that may be left
after the backing paper has been pulled off.

3.8.2 Converting headlights designed for driv‐


ing on the left to driving on the right

Note

♦ The headlight conversion set comprises 2 pieces of film.


♦ Please note the different part numbers for the headlight con‐
version sets from right to left-hand traffic and from left to right-
hand traffic.
♦ Before converting the lenses, clean the headlights.

– Turn light switch to “0” position.


– Clean headlight lens.

118 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Left headlight:
– Remove backing of application film -B- only in area marked
-C-.
– Align application film -B- with the outer edge to line -A- on the
headlight lens.
– Press area -C- firmly against headlight lens.
– Carefully pull application film -B- off headlight lens again.
– Masking film -C- remains on headlight lens.
Right headlight:

– Remove backing of application film -B- only in area marked


-C-.
– Align application film -B- with the outer edge to line -A- on the
headlight lens.
– Press area -C- firmly against headlight lens.
– Carefully pull application film -B- off headlight lens again.
– Masking film -C- remains on headlight lens.

Caution

Risk of plastic erosion.


If using solvent-based cleaners, the plastic lens of the head‐
light could become damaged.
To remove any adhesive residue on the plastic headlight len‐
ses, use only alcohol-based cleaning agents or those with a
diluted alcohol mix (isopropanol).

Note

♦ Remove any adhesive residue using alcohol-based or diluted


alcohol-based cleaning fluids. For example a cloth soaked
with isopropyl alcohol.
♦ Inform customers how to remove adhesive that may be left
after the backing paper has been pulled off.

3.9 Adjusting headlights


Adjust headlight with halogen bulbs ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ;
Descriptions of work .

3. Headlight with halogen bulbs 119


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

4 Fog lights
Fault detection and fault display:
The onboard supply control unit has a self-diagnostic function,
which makes fault finding on front fog lights easier.
For fault finding, use vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system - VAS 5051A- in “Guided fault finding” mode.

4.1 Assembly overview - fog lights

1 - Front bumper cover


2 - Fog light housing
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 120
3 - Left fog light bulb - L22- or
right fog light bulb - L23- and
left static cornering light - M51-
or right static cornering light -
M52-
❑ Bulb H8 12V, 35W
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 122
4 - Cover
5 - Securing bolt
❑ 2 Nm

4.2 Removing and installing fog light

Note

The illustrations show removal and installation of the front left fog
light.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

120 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Unclip cover cap -1- at detents -arrows-.

– Remove securing bolt -arrow-.

– Swing out fog light housing -1- from bumper cover, taking con‐
nected wiring lengths into consideration.

– Release and separate connector -1- and remove fog light


housing -2-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– Tighten all threaded connections to torques specified in as‐
sembly overview ⇒ page 120 .
– Check function of headlight.
– Checking fog light settings and adjusting if necessary in “Main‐
tenance Manual”: ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Description of
work .

4. Fog lights 121


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

4.3 Removing and installing fog light / static


cornering light bulb

Note

♦ Depending on activation, the bulb in the headlight housing


controls the function of the static cornering light or of the fog
light.
♦ Illustration shows removal and installation on left fog light.
♦ Removal and installation of the right fog light is carried out in
basically the same way.

Removing:
– Detach front wheel housing liner in front area to gain access
to back of fog light ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr.
66 ; Wheel housing liner .
– Release connector -1- and disconnect.
– Turn bulb holder together with fog light / static cornering light
bulb -2- in -direction of arrow- and remove it from the fog light.
The fog light / static cornering light bulb is permanently attached
to the bulb holder and cannot be renewed separately.
Fog light bulb : H8 12 V, 35W
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– Check function of headlight.
– Adjusting fog lights ⇒ page 122 .

4.4 Adjusting fog lights


Adjusting spray jet in “Maintenance Manual” ⇒ Maintenance ;
Booklet ; Description of work .

122 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

5 Turn signal repeater and entry light in


exterior mirror

5.1 General description

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011


⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
General description:
The turn signals (side repeaters) are integrated in the exterior
mirror housings.
In addition, there is an entry light in each exterior mirror housing
which illuminates the entry area around the open driver or front
passenger door in the dark.
1 - Driver side turn signal repeater bulb - L131- or front passenger
side turn signal repeater bulb - L132-
2 - Driver side entry light in exterior mirror - W52- or front pas‐
senger side entry light in exterior mirror - W53-
Fault detection and fault display:
The onboard supply control unit has a self-diagnostic function,
which makes fault finding easier.
For fault finding, use vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system - VAS 5051A- in “Guided fault finding” mode.

5.2 Turn signal repeater bulb


The driver side turn signal repeater bulb - L131- and the front
passenger side turn signal repeater bulb - L132- are installed in
the left/right exterior mirror housing respectively. Renewal of DEL
light source is not possible.

5.2.1 Removing and installing turn signal re‐


peater bulb

Note

In the event of damage, the complete driver side turn signal lamp
in exterior mirror - L131- or the complete front passenger side turn
signal lamp in exterior mirror - L132- must be renewed.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove driver side turn signal repeater bulb - L131- unit or
front passenger side turn signal repeater bulb - L132- unit ⇒
General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Rear view mirror;
Removing and installing turn signal repeater .

5. Turn signal repeater and entry light in exterior mirror 123


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Installing:
– Remove driver side turn signal repeater bulb - L131- unit or
front passenger side turn signal repeater bulb - L132- unit ⇒
General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Rear view mirror;
Removing and installing turn signal repeater .

Note

After installing, check operation of exterior mirrors.

5.3 Entry light in exterior mirror

5.3.1 Removing and installing drive side entry


light in exterior mirror - W52-
The driver side entry light in exterior mirror - W52- and the front
passenger side entry light in exterior mirror - W53- are installed
in the lower part of respective left or right exterior mirror housing.
Renewal of entry light bulb is described below.

Note

♦ In the event of damage to the lens, entry light in exterior mirror


must be renewed together with lower part of exterior mirror
housing.
♦ The procedure for renewal of the bulb on the driver and front
passenger side is the same and is therefore described for one
side only.

Renewing bulb:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove bottom of exterior mirror housing ⇒ General body
repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Exterior mirrors .
– To release, twist holder -1- in -direction of arrow- and pull out
together with bulb.

124 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Pull out wedge-base bulb -1- in -direction of arrow- straight


from bulb holder -2-.
Glass-base bulb: 12 V, 5 W
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Note

After installing, check operation of exterior mirrors.

5. Turn signal repeater and entry light in exterior mirror 125


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

6 Tail light clusters

6.1 Assembly overview - tail light cluster in


side panel

Note

The tail light cluster in the side panel includes, besides the yellow
turn signal bulb -4-, a single-filament bulb -3- which, depending
on activation, functions as brake and tail light cluster.

1 - Securing bolt
❑ Specified torque: tight‐
en by hand to stop (max.
2 Nm)
2 - Bulb carrier
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 128
3 - Left brake and tail light bulb
- M21- or right brake and tail
light bulb - M22-
❑ Bulb 12V, P21W
4 - Rear left turn signal bulb -
M6- or rear right turn signal
bulb - M8-
❑ Bulb 12V, PY21W
5 - Tail light housing in side
panel
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 127

126 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

6.2 Removing and installing tail light cluster


in side panel

Note

The illustrations show removal and installation for the left side.
The removal of the right side is basically a mirror image.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
Left-hand side of vehicle:
– Open stowage compartment and remove cover -1-.

– Twist plug -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove.

– Unscrew securing bolt -1-.


Right-hand side of vehicle:

6. Tail light clusters 127


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Push down decorative strip -2- in right luggage compartment


trim and unscrew securing bolt -1-.
Continued for both sides of vehicle:
– Take tail light housing out of body aperture in side panel. Ob‐
serve connected wiring lengths when doing this.

– Pull primary locking mechanism -arrow- and release and sep‐


arate connector -1-.
– Remove tail light housing.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Caution

Risk of wiring damage.


The wiring harness for the tail lights could become trapped
when installing.
Once the electrical connector has been fitted, the wiring har‐
ness must be fed through the aperture to the inside without it
getting trapped.

– Screw in securing bolt onto stop by hand (max. 2 Nm), and fit
and lock connector.
– When installation is complete, check gap/shut lines to body,
and check function of tail light cluster.

6.3 Removing and installing tail light bulb


cluster carrier in side panel

Note

The illustrations show removal and installation for the left side.
The removal of the right side is basically a mirror image.

Removing:
– Remove tail light cluster in side panel ⇒ page 127 .

128 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release retaining tabs -1-, -2-, -3- and -4- each in


-direction of arrow-, and remove bulb carrier -5- from tail light
housing.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– After inserting bulb carrier, check that all retaining tabs are
surely locked.

6.4 Renewing brake and tail light cluster and


turn signal bulbs in tail light cluster in
side panel

Note

♦ The illustrations show removal and installation for the left side.
The removal of the right side is basically a mirror image.
♦ The tail light cluster in the side panel includes, besides the
yellow turn signal bulb, a single-filament bulb which, depend‐
ing on activation, functions as brake and tail light cluster.

Removing:
– Remove tail light bulb carrier in side panel ⇒ page 128 .
– Push brake and tail light bulb -1- or turn signal bulb -2- into
holder, turn anti-clockwise and pull out upwards from bulb car‐
rier.
Bulb for brake and tail light: 12V, P21W
Turn signal bulb: 12V, PY21W
Installing:
Install in reverse order of removal.

6.5 Assembly overview - tail light cluster in


rear lid

Note

Besides the tail light bulb, the tail light cluster in the rear lid also
includes the rear fog light bulb. For left-hand drive vehicles, the
rear fog light bulb is only located in the left tail light cluster, and
for right-hand drive vehicles, only in the right tail light cluster. It is
not fitted in vehicles for USA and Canada.

6. Tail light clusters 129


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Securing nuts
❑ Specified torque: 3 Nm
2 - Bulb carrier
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 131
3 - Left tail light bulb - M4- or
right tail light bulb - M2-
❑ Glass-base bulb
12V, W5W
4 - Left tail light bulb - M4- or
right tail light bulb - M2-
❑ Glass-base bulb
12V, W5W
5 - Left rear fog light bulb - L46-
or right rear fog light bulb - L47-
or
❑ Glass-base bulb
12V, H21W
6 - Left reverse light bulb -
M16- or right reverse light bulb
- M17-
❑ Bulb 12 V, W16W
7 - Tail light housing in rear lid
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 130

6.6 Removing and installing tail light cluster


in rear lid

Note

The illustrations show removal and installation for the left side.
The removal of the right side is basically a mirror image.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

130 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Unclip service cover -1- from trim in rear lid.

– Pull primary locking mechanism -arrow- and release and sep‐


arate connector -1-.

– Unscrew three securing nuts -1-, and remove tail light housing
upwards out of body aperture in rear lid.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– Tighten securing nuts to torque specified in assembly over‐
view ⇒ page 129 .
– Fit connector and engage securely.
– When installation is complete, check gap/shut lines to body,
and check function of tail light cluster.

6.7 Removing and installing tail light cluster


bulb carrier in rear lid
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Unclip service cover -1- from trim in rear lid.

6. Tail light clusters 131


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Pull primary locking mechanism -arrow- and release and sep‐


arate connector -1-.

– Release retaining tabs -1- and -2- in -direction of arrow-, and


detach bulb carrier -3- downwards from tail light housing.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

When inserting bulb carrier, ensure that both retaining tabs en‐
gage audibly.

6.8 Renewing brake and tail light bulbs in


rear lid

Note

♦ The illustrations show removal and installation for the left side.
The removal of the right side is basically a mirror image.
♦ Aside from the bulbs for tail light cluster and reversing light,
the tail light cluster in the rear lid also includes the bulb for the
rear fog light. On left-hand drive vehicles, the rear fog light bulb
is only located in the left tail light cluster. On right-hand drive
vehicles, it is only located in the right tail light cluster.

Removing:
– Remove tail light bulb carrier in side panel ⇒ page 131 .
– Pull out respective tail light bulb -1- straight upwards from bulb
carrier.
– Push rear fog lamp bulb -2- into holder, turn anti-clockwise and
pull out of bulb carrier.
– Pull reversing light bulb -3- in a straight line upwards out of
bulb carrier.
Tail light bulbs -1-: glass-base bulb 12V, W5W
Rear fog lamp bulb -2-: bulb 12V, H21W
Reversing light bulb: glass-base bulb 12V, W16W
Installing:
Install in reverse order of removal.

132 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

7 Number plate light

7.1 Clipped number plate light - X-

7.1.1 Removing and installing clipped number


plate light
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Carefully lever out number plate light -1- from rear lid using a
suitable screwdriver -arrow-.

– Release and separate connector -1- and remove number plate


light -2-.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

♦ Insert number plate light into bumper cover so that connector


points to right-hand side of vehicle.
♦ Engage number plate light securely in body aperture.

– Check function of number plate light.

7.1.2 Removing and installing clipped number


plate light bulb
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove number plate light ⇒ page 133 .

7. Number plate light 133


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Carefully pull glass-base bulb -1- out of bulb holder.


Bulb for clipped number plate light: glass-base bulb 12 V, W 5 W
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

134 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

8 High-level brake lights

8.1 High-level brake light bulb - M25-

8.1.1 Removing and installing high-level


brake light bulb - M25-

Note

♦ Failure of LEDs in high-level brake lights:


♦ The individual LEDs (light-emitting diodes) in the high-level
brake lights are in groups of four, which are supplied with cur‐
rent independently.
♦ The high-level brake light is designed in such a way that the
legal requirements are still met in the event that one LED group
fails.
♦ If a further LED group fails, these requirements are no longer
met according to the legislator.
♦ Due to the failure of one LED group, the intact LEDs are placed
under increased strain; it must be anticipated that further LED
groups will soon fail.
♦ If more than four individual LEDs in the high-level brake light
have failed, the high-level brake light must be renewed (repair
measure).

The spray jet of the rear window washer system is integrated in


the high-level brake light .
Renewing and adjusting spray jet of rear window washer system
⇒ page 75
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Plastic wedge - T10039/1-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

8. High-level brake lights 135


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Attach a strip of adhesive tape -1- to the area of the rear lid
above the brake light.

Caution

Make sure the seal is not damaged when removing the high-
level brake light.

– Insert plastic wedge - T10039/1- -1- at top between high-level


brake light bulb - M25- -2- and rear lid.

– Release high-level brake light bulb - M25- by pushing wedge


in -direction of arrow- and remove it from rear lid, taking con‐
nected wiring length into consideration.

– Pull out hose lock -arrow- and pull off hose connection -1- from
high-level brake light bulb - M25- .
– Release and detach connector -2- and remove high-level
brake light - M25- .
Installing:

Note

When installing high-level brake light bulb - M25- , ensure seal is


seated correctly. Seal must not be kinked or damaged.

– Connect and engage hose connection and connectors.


– Clip brake light back into rear lid, starting at bottom.
– Check high-level brake light bulb - M25- and rear window
washer system for fault-free function.

8.1.2 Checking high-level brake light - M25-


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

136 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

9 Steering column switch

9.1 General description

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 139 .

The components of the steering column combination switch,


steering column electronics control unit and steering column
switch base are installed as 2 different versions depending on
equipment level (manufacturers: Valeo or Kostal). The visible
fastening of the steering column electronics control unit to the
steering column combination switch can be used to identify which
version is installed.
♦ Manufacturer: Valeo, 3 bolts
♦ Manufacturer: 1 bolt at bottom and 2 fasteners at top

Note

♦ When a new steering column electronics control unit - J527-


is installed, it must be coded ⇒ page 142 .
♦ Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
Fault detection and fault display:
The steering column electronics control unit - J527- is equipped
with self-diagnosis, which is designed to simplify fault finding.
For fault finding, use vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system - VAS 5051A- in “Guided fault finding” mode.

9.2 Assembly overview - steering column


switch

Note

The components steering column electronics control unit - J527- ,


steering column combination switch - E595- and the steering col‐
umn switch base are available as different versions depending on
manufacturer (Valeo or Kostal). Illustration of assembly overview
shows Valeo version.

9. Steering column switch 137


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Steering column electronics


control unit - J527-
❑ Note removal and instal‐
lation sequence
⇒ page 139 .
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Valeo)
⇒ page 140
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Kostal)
⇒ page 141
❑ Coding ⇒ page 142
❑ Securing bolt specified
torque (M8): 1.5 Nm
2 - Steering column combina‐
tion switch - E595-
❑ Note removal and instal‐
lation sequence
⇒ page 139 .
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Valeo)
⇒ page 143
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Kostal)
⇒ page 143
3 - Steering column switch car‐
rier
❑ Note removal and instal‐
lation sequence
⇒ page 139 .
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Valeo)
⇒ page 144
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Kostal)
⇒ page 146
4 - Shear bolts
❑ M8x20
❑ Shear torque: approx. 15 Nm
5 - Steering lock housing
Steering lock housing is removed and installed together with steering column switch base.
❑ Note removal and installation sequence ⇒ page 139 .
❑ Removing and installing (manufacturer: Valeo) ⇒ page 144
❑ Removing and installing (manufacturer: Kostal) ⇒ page 146
6 - Ignition/starter switch and lock cylinder.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 162 .

138 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

9.3 Removal and installation sequence of


components of steering column switch

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

For removal of the complete steering column switch, including


base, the switch is dismantled and the steering lock housing is
also removed. For assembly of the steering lock housing, new
shear bolts are required.
Even if just one component of the steering column switch is re‐
moved or renewed, the sequence described as follows must be
adhered to.
Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .

WARNING

♦ Danger of triggering of the airbag!


♦ Improper action on airbag unit may result in the triggering
of the airbag!
♦ Observe safety precautions when working on airbag ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Safety
precautions when working on airbag .

– Remove steering wheel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.


gr. 69 ; Airbag .
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
The components of the steering column switch are to be removed
in the following sequence:
♦ Steering column electronics control unit - J527- ⇒ page 139 .
♦ Steering column combination switch - E595- ⇒ page 142 .
♦ Steering column switch base ⇒ page 144
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

9.4 Steering column electronics control unit


- J527-
The steering column electronics control unit - J527- comprises the
following components and cannot be dismantled:
♦ Airbag coil connector and return ring with slip ring - F138-
♦ Steering angle sender - G85-

9. Steering column switch 139


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Note

♦ If a new steering column electronics control unit - J527- is in‐


stalled, the inserted transport protection must be removed
before installation.
♦ When a new steering column electronics control unit - J527-
is installed, it must be coded ⇒ page 142 .
♦ In the event of faults in the steering column switch, the coding
of the steering column electronics control unit - J527- must be
checked ⇒ page 142 .

Removal and installation of steering column electronics control


unit - J527- are different, depending on manufacturer.
♦ Removing and installing steering column electronics control
unit - J527- (manufacturer: Valeo) ⇒ page 140
♦ Removing and installing steering column electronics control
unit - J527- (manufacturer: Kostal) ⇒ page 141

9.4.1 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn electronics control unit - J527-
(manufacturer: Valeo)
Removing:

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 139 .

WARNING

♦ Danger of triggering of the airbag!


♦ Improper action on airbag unit may result in the triggering
of the airbag!
♦ Observe safety precautions when working on airbag ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Safety
precautions when working on airbag .

– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .


Remove the following components in sequence (one after the
other):
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag .

140 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;


Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
– Depending on equipment level, release and detach connec‐
tors -1-, -2-, -3- and -4-.

Note

Coil connector on steering column electronics control unit - J527-


must not be twisted from its centre position. The front wheels must
be in “straight-ahead” position.

– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- and pull off steering column


electronics control unit - J527- backwards from steering col‐
umn switch.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Caution

Turn signal switch reset lever can break when control unit is
being installed.
Turn signal lever must be in 0 position when control unit is in‐
stalled so that reset lever is not extended.

– Push steering column electronics control unit - J527- straight


onto steering column switch until it securely engages.
– Screw three securing bolts of steering column electronics con‐
trol unit - J527- into steering column switch module and tighten
to 1.5 Nm.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

9.4.2 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn electronics control unit - J527-
(manufacturer: Kostal)
Removing:

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 139 .

WARNING

♦ Danger of triggering of the airbag!


♦ Improper action on airbag unit may result in the triggering
of the airbag!
♦ Observe safety precautions when working on airbag ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Safety
precautions when working on airbag .

9. Steering column switch 141


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .


Remove the following components in sequence (one after the
other):
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag .
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
– Depending on equipment level, release and detach connec‐
tors -1-, -2-, -3-, -4- and -5-.
– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow B-.

Note

Coil connector for steering column electronics on steering column


electronics control unit - J527- must not be twisted from its centre
position. The front wheels must be in “straight-ahead” position.

– Release both latches -arrows A- and pull off steering column


electronics control unit - J527- backwards from steering col‐
umn switch.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Caution

Turn signal switch reset lever can break when control unit is
being installed.
Turn signal lever must be in 0 position when control unit is in‐
stalled so that reset lever is not extended.

– Push steering column electronics control unit - J527- onto the


steering column switch.
– Screw in securing bolt of steering column electronics control
unit - J527- into steering column switch module and tighten to
1.5 Nm.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

9.4.3 Coding steering column electronics con‐


trol unit - J527-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

9.5 Steering column combination switch -


E595-
Depending on equipment, the steering column combination
switch - E595- comprises the following components and cannot
be dismantled:
♦ Turn signal switch - E2-
♦ Windscreen wiper switch - E-
♦ Cruise control system switch - E45-

142 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removal and installation of steering column combination switch


are different, depending on manufacturer.
♦ Removing and installing steering column combination switch
- E595- (manufacturer: Valeo) ⇒ page 143 .
♦ Removing and installing steering column combination switch
- E595- (manufacturer: Kostal) ⇒ page 143 .

9.5.1 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn combination switch - E595- (man‐
ufacturer: Valeo)

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 139 .

Removing:
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag .
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
– Remove steering column electronics control unit - J527-
⇒ page 139 .
– Release fasteners -1-.
– Using a suitable tool, release catches -2-, and pull complete
steering column combination switch - E595- in a straight line
toward rear off steering column switch carrier.
Installing:
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- straight into
guides on base of steering column switch until it securely en‐
gages.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

9.5.2 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn combination switch - E595- (man‐
ufacturer: Kostal)

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 139 .

9. Steering column switch 143


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag .
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
– Remove steering column electronics control unit - J527-
⇒ page 139 .
– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- and pull off complete steering
column combination switch - E595- -1- in a straight line back‐
wards from base of steering column switch.
Installing:
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- straight into
guides on steering column switch carrier.
– Screw in securing bolt -arrow- and tighten to 1.5 Nm.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

9.6 Steering column switch carrier


Removal and installation of steering column switch carrier is dif‐
ferent, depending on manufacturer.
♦ Removing and installing steering column switch carrier (man‐
ufacturer: Valeo) ⇒ page 144
♦ Removing and installing steering column switch carrier (man‐
ufacturer: Kostal) ⇒ page 146

9.6.1 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn switch carrier (manufacturer: Va‐
leo)

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 139 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Angle hand drill
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1410-

144 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:

Note

To remove steering column switch carrier -2-, shear-head bolts


-1- of steering lock housing must be drilled out. New shear bolts
are required for subsequent installation ⇒ Electronics parts cata‐
logue (ETKA) .

Caution

♦ Ensure that all the components mounted on the base have


been removed before drilling out the shear-head bolts.
♦ The drilling operation can cause swarf to penetrate the
adjacent components resulting in damage and/or mal‐
function!
♦ Adhere to the specified sequence when removing com‐
ponents of the steering column switch ⇒ page 151 .

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove all components attached to base in prescribed se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .
The carrier can be removed once all the components mounted to
it have been removed:

– Drill out shear bolts -1- of steering lock housing -3-.

Note

Bolts M8 -1-, core diameter 6.8 mm

– Pull off steering lock housing -3- and base of steering column
switch -2- backwards from steering column.
– Remove steering lock housing -3- from base of steering col‐
umn switch.
Installing:

9. Steering column switch 145


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Insert steering lock housing -3- into steering column switch


carrier -2-.
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- straight into
steering column switch carrier until it securely engages.
– Push preassembled unit consisting of steering lock housing,
steering column switch base and steering column combination
switch - E595- as far as it will go onto the steering column, and
align it with threaded holes.
– Secure steering lock housing -3- to steering column using new
shear bolts -1-.
– Tighten new shear-head bolts -1- until bolt heads shear off.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

9.6.2 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn switch carrier (manufacturer: Kos‐
tal)

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 139 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Angle hand drill
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1410-

146 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:

Note

To remove steering column switch carrier -2-, shear-head bolts


-1- of steering lock housing must be drilled out. New shear bolts
are required for subsequent installation ⇒ Electronics parts cata‐
logue (ETKA) .

Caution

♦ Ensure that all the components mounted on the base have


been removed before drilling out the shear-head bolts.
♦ The drilling operation can cause swarf to penetrate the
adjacent components resulting in damage and/or mal‐
function!
♦ Adhere to the specified sequence when removing com‐
ponents of the steering column switch ⇒ page 151 .

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove all components attached to base in prescribed se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .
The carrier can be removed once all the components mounted to
it have been removed:

– Drill out shear bolts -1- of steering lock housing -3-.

Note

Bolts M8 -1-, core diameter 6.8 mm

– Pull off steering lock housing -3- and base of steering column
switch -2- backwards from steering column.
– Remove steering lock housing from steering base of column
switch.
Installing:

9. Steering column switch 147


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Insert steering lock housing -3- into base of steering column


switch -2-.
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- onto base
of steering column switch and screw in bottom bolt.
– Push preassembled unit consisting of steering lock housing,
steering column switch base and steering column combination
switch - E595- as far as it will go onto the steering column, and
align it with threaded holes.
– Secure steering lock housing -3- to steering column using new
shear bolts -1-.
– Tighten new shear-head bolts -1- until bolt heads shear off.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

148 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

10 Steering column switch, vehicles with


KESSY

10.1 General description

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .

The components of the steering column combination switch,


steering column electronics control unit and steering column
switch base are installed as 2 different versions depending on
equipment level (manufacturers: Valeo or Kostal). The visible
fastening of the steering column electronics control unit to the
steering column combination switch can be used to identify which
version is installed.
♦ Manufacturer: Valeo, 3 bolts
♦ Manufacturer: 1 bolt at bottom and 2 fasteners at top

Note

♦ When a new electronics steering column lock control unit -


J764- is installed, it must be coded ⇒ page 161 .
♦ When a new steering column electronics control unit - J527-
is installed, it must be coded ⇒ page 154 .
♦ Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
Fault detection and fault display:
The electronic steering column lock control unit - J764- is equip‐
ped with self-diagnosis, which makes fault finding easier.
For fault finding, use vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system - VAS 5051A- in “Guided fault finding” mode.

10.2 Assembly overview - steering column


switch

Note

The components steering column electronics control unit - J527- ,


steering column combination switch - E595- and the steering col‐
umn switch base are available as different versions depending on
manufacturer (Valeo or Kostal). Illustration of assembly overview
shows Valeo version.

10. Steering column switch, vehicles with KESSY 149


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Steering column electronics


control unit - J527-
❑ Note removal and instal‐
lation sequence
⇒ page 151 .
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Valeo)
⇒ page 152
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Kostal)
⇒ page 153
❑ Coding ⇒ page 154
❑ Securing bolt specified
torque (M8): 1.5 Nm
2 - Steering column combina‐
tion switch - E595-
❑ Note removal and instal‐
lation sequence
⇒ page 151 .
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Valeo)
⇒ page 155
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Kostal)
⇒ page 155
3 - Steering column switch car‐
rier
❑ Note removal and instal‐
lation sequence
⇒ page 151 .
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Valeo)
⇒ page 156
❑ Removing and installing
(manufacturer: Kostal)
⇒ page 158
4 - Shear bolts
❑ M8x20
❑ Shear torque: approx. 15 Nm
5 - Electronic steering column lock control unit - J764-
The electronic steering column lock control unit - J764- is removed and installed together with the steering
column switch base.
❑ Note removal and installation sequence ⇒ page 151 .
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 161 .
❑ Coding ⇒ page 161
6 - Starter button - E378-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 176 .

150 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

10.3 Removal and installation sequence of


components of steering column switch

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

For removal of the complete steering column switch, inc. base,


and of the electronic steering column lock control unit - J764- ,
the switch is dismantled and the steering lock housing is also re‐
moved. For assembly of the electronic steering column lock con‐
trol unit - J764- , new shear bolts are required.
Even if just one component of the steering column switch is re‐
moved or renewed, the sequence described as follows must be
adhered to.
Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .

WARNING

♦ Danger of triggering of the airbag!


♦ Improper action on airbag unit may result in the triggering
of the airbag!
♦ Observe safety precautions when working on airbag ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Safety
precautions when working on airbag .

– Remove steering wheel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.


gr. 69 ; Airbag .
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
The components of the steering column switch are to be removed
in the following sequence:
♦ Steering column electronics control unit - J527- ⇒ page 151
♦ Steering column combination switch - E595- ⇒ page 154
♦ Control unit for electronic steering column lock - J764-
⇒ page 160
♦ Steering column switch base ⇒ page 156
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

10.4 Steering column electronics control unit


- J527-
The steering column electronics control unit - J527- comprises the
following components and cannot be dismantled:
♦ Airbag coil connector and return ring with slip ring - F138-
♦ Steering angle sender - G85-

10. Steering column switch, vehicles with KESSY 151


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Note

♦ If a new steering column electronics control unit - J527- is in‐


stalled, the inserted transport protection must be removed
before installation.
♦ When a new steering column electronics control unit - J527-
is installed, it must be coded ⇒ page 154 .
♦ In the event of faults in the steering column switch, the coding
of the steering column electronics control unit - J527- must be
checked ⇒ page 154 .

Removal and installation of steering column electronics control


unit - J527- are different, depending on manufacturer.
♦ Removing and installing steering column electronics control
unit - J527- (manufacturer: Valeo) ⇒ page 152
♦ Removing and installing steering column electronics control
unit - J527- (manufacturer: Kostal) ⇒ page 153

10.4.1 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn electronics control unit - J527-
(manufacturer: Valeo)
Removing:

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .

WARNING

♦ Danger of triggering of the airbag!


♦ Improper action on airbag unit may result in the triggering
of the airbag!
♦ Observe safety precautions when working on airbag ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Safety
precautions when working on airbag .

– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .


Remove the following components in sequence (one after the
other):
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag .

152 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;


Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
– Depending on equipment level, release and detach connec‐
tors -1-, -2-, -3- and -4-.

Note

Coil connector on steering column electronics control unit - J527-


must not be twisted from its centre position. The front wheels must
be in “straight-ahead” position.

– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- and pull off steering column


electronics control unit - J527- backwards from steering col‐
umn switch.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Caution

Turn signal switch reset lever can break when control unit is
being installed.
Turn signal lever must be in 0 position when control unit is in‐
stalled so that reset lever is not extended.

– Push steering column electronics control unit - J527- in a


straight line onto steering column switch.
– Screw three securing bolts of steering column electronics con‐
trol unit - J527- into steering column switch module and tighten
to 1.5 Nm.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

10.4.2 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn electronics control unit - J527-
(manufacturer: Kostal)
Removing:

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .

WARNING

♦ Danger of triggering of the airbag!


♦ Improper action on airbag unit may result in the triggering
of the airbag!
♦ Observe safety precautions when working on airbag ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Safety
precautions when working on airbag .

10. Steering column switch, vehicles with KESSY 153


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .


Remove the following components in sequence (one after the
other):
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag .
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
– Depending on equipment level, release and detach connec‐
tors -1-, -2-, -3-, -4- and -5-.
– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow B-.

Note

Coil connector on steering column electronics control unit - J527-


must not be twisted from its centre position. The front wheels must
be in “straight-ahead” position.

– Release both latches -arrows A- and pull off steering column


electronics control unit - J527- in a straight line backwards
from steering column switch.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Caution

Turn signal switch reset lever can break when control unit is
being installed.
Turn signal lever must be in 0 position when control unit is in‐
stalled so that reset lever is not extended.

– Push steering column electronics control unit - J527- in a


straight line onto steering column switch until it engages se‐
curely.
– Screw in securing bolt of steering column electronics control
unit - J527- into steering column switch module and tighten to
1.5 Nm.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

10.4.3 Coding steering column electronics con‐


trol unit - J527-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

10.5 Steering column combination switch -


E595-
Depending on equipment, the steering column combination
switch - E595- comprises the following components and cannot
be dismantled:
♦ Turn signal switch - E2-
♦ Windscreen wiper switch - E-
♦ Cruise control system switch - E45-

154 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removal and installation of steering column combination switch


are different, depending on manufacturer.
♦ Removing and installing steering column combination switch
- E595- (manufacturer: Valeo) ⇒ page 155 .
♦ Removing and installing steering column combination switch
- E595- (manufacturer: Kostal) ⇒ page 155 .

10.5.1 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn combination switch - E595- (man‐
ufacturer: Valeo)

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .

Removing:
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag .
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
– Remove steering column electronics control unit - J527-
⇒ page 151 .
– Release both latches -arrows- and pull off complete steering
column combination switch - E595- in a straight line back‐
wards off base of steering column switch.
Installing:
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- straight into
guides on base of steering column switch until it securely en‐
gages.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

10.5.2 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn combination switch - E595- (man‐
ufacturer: Kostal)

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .

Removing:
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag .
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .

10. Steering column switch, vehicles with KESSY 155


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove steering column electronics control unit - J527-


⇒ page 151 .
– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- and pull off complete steering
column combination switch - E595- -1- in a straight line back‐
wards from base of steering column switch.
Installing:
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- in straight
line into guides on base of steering column switch.
– Screw in securing bolt -arrow- and tighten to 1.5 Nm.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

10.6 Steering column switch carrier


Removal and installation of steering column switch carrier is dif‐
ferent, depending on manufacturer.
♦ Removing and installing steering column switch carrier (man‐
ufacturer: Valeo) ⇒ page 156
♦ Removing and installing steering column switch carrier (man‐
ufacturer: Kostal) ⇒ page 158

10.6.1 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn switch carrier (manufacturer: Va‐
leo)

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Angle hand drill
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1410-

156 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:

Note

To remove steering column switch base -2-, shear-head bolts


-1- of electronic steering column lock control unit - J764- must be
drilled out. New shear bolts are required for subsequent installa‐
tion ⇒ Electronics parts catalogue (ETKA) .

Caution

♦ Ensure that all the components mounted on the base have


been removed before drilling out the shear-head bolts.
♦ The drilling operation can cause swarf to penetrate the
adjacent components resulting in damage and/or mal‐
function!
♦ Adhere to the specified sequence when removing com‐
ponents of the steering column switch ⇒ page 151 .

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove all components attached to base in prescribed se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .
The carrier can be removed once all the components mounted to
it have been removed:

– Drill out shear-head bolts -1- of electronic steering column lock


control unit - J764- -3-.

Note

Bolts M8 -1-, core diameter 6.8 mm

– Release and separate connector on rear of electronic steering


column lock control unit - J764- -3- and remove electronic
steering column lock control unit - J764- together with base of
steering column switch -2-.

10. Steering column switch, vehicles with KESSY 157


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release latches -arrows- on base of steering column switch


and remove base -1- from electronic steering column lock
control unit - J764- -2-.
Installing:

– Fit base of steering column switch -1- onto electronic steering


column lock control unit - J764- -2- until it engages securely.
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- onto base
of steering column switch until it engages securely.
– Push preassembled unit consisting of electronic steering col‐
umn lock control unit - J764- , steering column switch base and
steering column combination switch - E595- onto steering col‐
umn as far as it will go and align with threaded holes.

– Secure electronic steering column lock control unit - J764- to


steering column using new shear bolts -1-.
– Tighten new shear-head bolts -1- until bolt heads shear off.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

Note

When a new electronics steering column lock control unit - J764-


is installed, it must be coded ⇒ page 161 .

10.6.2 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn switch carrier (manufacturer: Kos‐
tal)

Caution

The removal and installation of individual components of the


steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Angle hand drill

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

158 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1410-

Removing:

Note

To remove steering column switch base -3-, shear-head bolts


-1- of electronic steering column lock control unit - J764- -4- must
be drilled out. New shear bolts are required for subsequent in‐
stallation ⇒ Electronics parts catalogue (ETKA) .

Caution

♦ Ensure that all the components mounted on the base have


been removed before drilling out the shear-head bolts.
♦ The drilling operation can cause swarf to penetrate the
adjacent components resulting in damage and/or mal‐
function!
♦ Adhere to the specified sequence when removing com‐
ponents of the steering column switch ⇒ page 151 .

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove all components attached to base in prescribed se‐
quence ⇒ page 151 .
The carrier can be removed once all the components mounted to
it have been removed:

10. Steering column switch, vehicles with KESSY 159


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove shear bolts -1- of electronic steering column lock


control unit - J764- -4-.

Note

Bolts M8 -1-, core diameter 6.8 mm

– Release and separate connector -2- on rear of electronic


steering column lock control unit - J764- -4- and remove elec‐
tronic steering column lock control unit - J764- together with
base of steering column switch -3-.

– Release both latches -arrows- on base of steering column


switch and remove base -1- from electronic steering column
lock control unit - J764- -2-.
Installing:

– Fit base of steering column switch -1- onto electronic steering


column lock control unit - J764- -2- until it engages securely.
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- onto base
of steering column switch and screw in bottom bolt to 1.5 Nm.
– Push preassembled unit consisting of electronic steering col‐
umn lock control unit - J764- , steering column switch base and
steering column combination switch - E595- onto steering col‐
umn as far as it will go and align with threaded holes.

– Secure electronic steering column lock control unit - J764-


-4- to steering column using new shear bolts -1-.
– Tighten new shear-head bolts -1- until bolt heads shear off.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

Note

When a new electronics steering column lock control unit - J764-


is installed, it must be coded ⇒ page 161 .

10.7 Control unit for electronic steering col‐


umn lock - J764-
On vehicles with KESSY, the steering column lock is not per‐
formed mechanically through the lock cylinder but electrically
through the electronic steering column lock ( electronic steering
column lock control unit - J764- ).

160 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

10.7.1 Removing and installing electronic


steering column lock control unit - J764-

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Note

♦ When a new electronics steering column lock control unit -


J764- is installed, it must be coded ⇒ page 161 .
♦ The electronic steering column lock control unit - J764- is re‐
moved and installed together with the steering column switch
base.

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove base of steering column switch ⇒ page 156 .

10.7.2 Coding electronic steering column lock


control unit - J764-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

10. Steering column switch, vehicles with KESSY 161


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

11 Ignition/starter switch and lock cylin‐


der.

11.1 Removing and installing steering lock


housing

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Note

The steering column switch carrier must be dismantled before the


steering lock housing can be removed.

Caution

♦ The steering lock could be destroyed.


♦ If the steering lock is actuated without lock cylinder, it will
block and must be renewed.
♦ The steering lock must not be actuated without lock cylin‐
der.

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove base of steering column switch:
♦ Vehicles with KESSY ⇒ page 156
♦ Vehicles with ignition/starter switch and lock cylinder
⇒ page 142

11.2 Removing and installing lock cylinder

Caution

♦ When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the


procedure described in the workshop manual must be
strictly observed ⇒ page 4 .
♦ The steering lock could be destroyed.
♦ If the steering lock is actuated without lock cylinder, it will
block and must be renewed.
♦ The steering lock must not be actuated without lock cylin‐
der.

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .

162 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;


Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .

Note

♦ For reasons of clarity, the illustration is shown without steering


column lever, coil connector or steering wheel. There is no
need to remove the components in order to remove the lock
cylinder.
♦ The immobiliser reading coil is secured to the lock cylinder and
cannot be renewed individually.
♦ For reasons of clarity, the ignition key is not shown in the fol‐
lowing illustrations.
♦ The hole may be 180° further than shown in the illustration.
This does however not affect the procedure for removing and
installing.

– Insert ignition key in lock cylinder and turn to position “Drive”.


Positions for key in lock cylinder:
1 - Position “Stop”
2 - Position “Drive”
3 - Position “Start”

Note

For reasons of clarity, the lock cylinder is shown in the following


illustration without ignition key.

– Insert a piece of steel wire (approx. diameter: 1.2 mm) in hole


-arrow- next to ignition key.
– Using steel wire -2- release locking lever -3- of lock cylinder
-1- -arrow-.
– Pull lock cylinder -1- out of steering lock housing.

11. Ignition/starter switch and lock cylinder. 163


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Pull off connector -arrow- on immobiliser reader coil.

Installing:

Note

For reasons of clarity, the ignition key is not shown in the following
illustration.

– Insert ignition key in lock cylinder -1- and turn to position


“Drive”.
– Using steel wire -2- release locking lever -3- of lock cylinder
-1- -arrow-.
– Attach connector to immobiliser reader coil.
– Insert lock cylinder -1- in steering lock housing.

Note

The connection for the reader coil of the immobiliser must be in‐
serted in the steering lock housing guide.

– Pull steel wire -2- out of lock cylinder -1- and check lock cyl‐
inder is seated correctly in the steering lock housing.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

11.3 Removing and installing ignition/starter


switch

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .

164 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

WARNING

♦ Danger of triggering of the airbag!


♦ Improper action on airbag unit may result in the triggering
of the airbag!
♦ Observe safety precautions when working on airbag ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Safety
precautions when working on airbag .

– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;


Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
– Pull off connector -2- from ignition/starter switch -1-.
– Release ignition/starter switch with small screwdriver
-arrows-.
– Pull out ignition/starter switch -1- from steering lock housing.
Installing:
– Push ignition/starter switch into steering lock housing until it
engages audibly.

– Insert ignition key in lock cylinder and turn to position “Drive”.

Note

The key must be in the “Drive” position.

Positions for key in lock cylinder:


1 - Position “Stop”
2 - Position “Drive”
3 - Position “Start”
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

11.3.1 Checking ignition/starter switch


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

11.4 Removing and installing ignition/starter


switch, vehicles with KESSY
For vehicles with KESSY, the starter button - E378- is installed
instead of the conventional ignition/starter switch.
Removing and installing starter button - E378- ⇒ page 176

11. Ignition/starter switch and lock cylinder. 165


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

11.5 Removing and installing ignition key


withdrawal lock solenoid - N376-
The ignition key withdrawal lock solenoid - N376- is located very
close to the ignition starter key.

Note

To remove ignition key on vehicles with dual clutch gearbox


(DSG), always move selector lever to position “P” first, then switch
off ignition. Otherwise the ignition key withdrawal lock solenoid -
N376- will inhibit the removal of the ignition key.

Removing:
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trim; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
– Release catch -2- with suitable screwdriver.
– Pull ignition key withdrawal lock solenoid - N376- -1- in direc‐
tion of arrow out of its mounting.
– The electrical connection will be disconnected automatically.
Installing:
– Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing
observe the following:

Note

After connecting the battery, carry out final control diagnosis to


reactivate the ignition key withdrawal lock solenoid - N376- .

166 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

12 Entry and start authorisation (KES‐


SY)

12.1 General description

Caution

When disconnecting or reconnecting the battery, adhere strict‐


ly to the procedure described in the workshop manual
⇒ page 4 .

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
Fault detection and fault display:
The access and start authorisation system (KESSY) is equipped
with self-diagnosis, which makes fault finding easier ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester, , Guided fault finding .
General description:
KESSY (Keyless Entry Start Stop System) controls keyless un‐
locking, locking and starting of the vehicle.
Opening:
The ID sender in the ignition key must be within the detection
range of a locking point (approx. 1.5 metres). When the door han‐
dle is touched, the proximity sensor on the inside of the door
handle is activated. The ID sender in the ignition key is read and
the door can be immediately unlocked on valid identification. Pull‐
ing the door handle will open the door.
Starting:
The ID sender in the ignition key must be located in the interior of
the vehicle. On vehicles with manual gearbox, the clutch pedal
must be depressed. On vehicles with dual clutch gearbox, the
selector lever must be in position P and brakes must be applied.
Briefly press ignition and starter button; the ID sender in the igni‐
tion key is read, and the steering unlock and start release are
authorised on valid identification.
Starting the engine with the ignition and starter button is possible
only when a valid ID sender is somewhere in the vehicle interior.
Locking:
The ID sender in the ignition key must be within the detection
range of a locking point (approx. 1.5 metres). The locking sensor
is activated when the locking sensor on the outside of the door
handle is touched. The ID sender in the ignition key is read and
the vehicle is locked on valid identification.
All functions concerning the entry and start authorisation are con‐
trolled via the entry and start authorisation control unit - J518-
⇒ page 169 .

12. Entry and start authorisation (KESSY) 167


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

12.2 Assembly overview - entry and start authorisation

1 - Detection range of aerials


2 - Front passenger side door
exterior handle
The following components are
integrated into the front pas‐
senger side door exterior han‐
dle:
♦ Front passenger door exte‐
rior handle contact sensor -
G416-
♦ Front passenger side aerial
for entry and start authori‐
sation - R135-
Removing and installing front
passenger side door exterior
handle ⇒ page 171 .
❑ Checking front passen‐
ger side aerial for entry
and start authorisation -
R135- ⇒ Vehicle diag‐
nostic tester, Guided
fault finding
❑ Checking front passen‐
ger door exterior handle
contact sensor - G416-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic
tester, Guided fault
finding

3 - Rear bumper aerial for entry


and start system - R136-
❑ Fitting location: behind
rear bumper cover
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 172
❑ Checking rear bumper
aerial for entry and start authorisation - R136- ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided fault finding
4 - Luggage compartment aerial for entry and start authorisation - R137-
❑ Fitting location: central in luggage compartment before the spare wheel recess
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 172
❑ Checking luggage compartment aerial for entry and start authorisation - R137- ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic
tester, Guided fault finding
5 - Interior aerial 2 for entry and start authorisation - R139-
❑ Location: inside vehicle in centre beneath second seat row
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 173
❑ Checking aerial 3 in interior for access and start authorisation - R154- ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided
fault finding

6 - Driver side door exterior handle


The following components are integrated into the driver side door exterior handle:
♦ Driver door exterior handle contact sensor - G415-

168 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Driver side aerial for entry and start authorisation - R134-


❑ Removing and installing driver side door exterior handle ⇒ page 171
❑ Checking driver door exterior handle contact sensor - G415- ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided fault
finding
❑ Checking driver side aerial for entry and start authorisation - R134- ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided
fault finding

7 - Starter button - E378-


❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 176
8 - Interior aerial 1 for entry and start authorisation - R138-
❑ Fitting location: in centre console in front of gear lever
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 174
❑ Checking interior aerial 1 for entry and start authorisation - R138- ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided
fault finding

9 - Entry and start authorisation control unit - J518-


❑ Fitting location: in driver's footwell, above brake pedal
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 169
❑ Coding entry and start authorisation control unit - J518- ⇒ page 171

12.3 Entry and start authorisation control unit


- J518-
All functions concerning the entry and start authorisation are con‐
trolled via the entry and start authorisation control unit - J518- .
The data bus diagnostic interface - J518- is located in the driver's
footwell, above the brake pedal.
After renewing the electronic steering column lock control unit -
J518- , the “entry and start authorisation” system must be coded
⇒ page 171 .

12.3.1 Removing and installing entry and start


authorisation control unit - J518-
After renewing the electronic steering column lock control unit -
J518- , the “entry and start authorisation” system must be coded
⇒ page 171 .
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove driver side footwell vent ⇒ Heating, ventilation, air
conditioning system; Rep. gr. 80 ; Heating; Repairing heating;
Passenger compartment; Removing vents .
– Remove trim in driver's footwell ⇒ General body repairs, in‐
terior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Trim; Removing and installing left trim on
driver side .
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 .

Note

In order to be able to pull the entry and start authorisation control


unit - J518- together with its holder off the pedal block, the steering
column must be lowered.

12. Entry and start authorisation (KESSY) 169


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Caution

Observe the instructions regarding handling and transport of


the steering column ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr.
48 ; Steering column and steering wheel; Handling and trans‐
port of steering column .

– Remove both securing bolts -2-.

– Unscrew bolt -1- and remove crash strut of clutch pedal -2-.
– Unscrew bolt -3- and remove crash strut of brake pedal -4-.

– Lower steering column only as far as necessary to allow re‐


moval of entry and start authorisation control unit - J518- from
pedal block.
– Release catch -arrow- and pull entry and start authorisation
control unit - J518- -2- together with holder -3- backwards out
of pedal bracket of brake pedal, taking lengths of connected
wires into consideration.
– Release and detach connector -1- and then remove entry and
start authorisation control unit - J518- -2- from holder -3-.
Installing:

Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Insert entry and start authorisation control unit - J518- -2- into
holder -3-.
– Insert bracket together with control unit into guides on pedal
bracket of brake pedal until it engages securely.
– Re-attach and secure connector -1-.
After renewing the electronic steering column lock control unit -
J518- , the “entry and start authorisation” system must be coded
⇒ page 171 .

170 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

12.3.2 Coding entry and start authorisation


control unit - J518-
After renewing the electronic steering column lock control unit -
J518- , the “entry and start authorisation” system must be coded.
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

12.4 Entry and start authorisation aerials and


sensors

12.4.1 Removing and installing front passenger


side door exterior handle
The following components are integrated into the front passenger
side door exterior handle:
♦ Front passenger door exterior handle contact sensor - G416-
♦ Front passenger side aerial for entry and start authorisation -
R135-

Note

♦ In the event of a fault, the complete door exterior handle must


always be replaced.
♦ Coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if the
door exterior handle is replaced. Erase the fault entry created
in the fault memory via “Guided fault finding” with vehicle di‐
agnostic tester .

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front right door exterior handle ⇒ General body re‐
pairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 57 ; Door components; Removing and
installing door handle .
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

12.4.2 Removing and installing driver side door


exterior handle
The following components are integrated into the driver side door
exterior handle:
♦ Driver door exterior handle contact sensor - G415-
♦ Driver side aerial for entry and start authorisation - R134-

Note

♦ In the event of a fault, the complete door exterior handle must


always be replaced.
♦ Coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if the
door exterior handle is replaced. Erase the fault entry created
in the fault memory via “Guided fault finding” with vehicle di‐
agnostic tester .

12. Entry and start authorisation (KESSY) 171


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front left door exterior handle ⇒ General body re‐
pairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 57 ; Door components; Removing and
installing door handle .
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

12.4.3 Removing and installing rear bumper


aerial for entry and start system - R136-
The rear bumper aerial for entry and start authorisation - R136-
is located behind the rear bumper cover.

Note

Coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if the rear
bumper aerial for entry and start authorisation - R136- is renewed.
Erase the fault entry created in the fault memory via “Guided fault
finding” with vehicle diagnostic tester .

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove rear bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 63 ; Rear bumper cover .
– Disengage rear bumper aerial for entry and start authorisation
- R136- -1- and pull it out of lower section of bumper cover,
taking lengths of connected wires into consideration.
– Release and separate connector -2- and remove rear bumper
aerial for entry and start authorisation - R136- -1-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

12.4.4 Removing and installing luggage com‐


partment aerial for entry and start au‐
thorisation - R137-
The access and start authorisation aerial in the luggage compart‐
ment - R137- is located inside the vehicle on the kick plate of the
right seat in the third seat row.

Note

Coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if the lug‐
gage compartment aerial for entry and start authorisation - R137-
is renewed. Erase the fault entry created in the fault memory via
“Guided fault finding” with vehicle diagnostic tester .

172 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Fold right seat of third seat row forwards.
– Lift up floor covering at separation point to gain access to kick
plate.
– Lever out access and start authorisation aerial in the luggage
compartment - R137- -1- from fastener in kick plate, taking
lengths of connected wires into consideration.
– Release and separate connector -2- and remove aerial from
vehicle.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

12.4.5 Removing and installing interior aerial 2


for entry and start authorisation - R139-
The interior aerial 2 for access and start authorisation - R139- is
located inside the vehicle on the centre tunnel beneath the middle
rear seat.

Note

Further coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if


the interior aerial 2 for entry and start authorisation - R139- is
renewed. Erase the fault entry created in the fault memory via
“Guided fault finding” with vehicle diagnostic tester .

Removing:

Note

The alignment and exact positioning of the aerials is essential for


their function. Mark the exact position and alignment of the aerial
to the interior before removing the interior access and start au‐
thorisation aerial 2 - R139- . Align and secure in original position
when installing. The thickness of the adhesive pad on the aerial
is part of its functionality. Do not use a commercial type adhesive
to restick if the adhesive bonding of an aerial is insecure. Install
a new aerial with new adhesive pad in this case. Non observance
will cause the KESSY system to malfunction.

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove seats of second seat row ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 72 ; Removing and installing rear seats
– Unclip both air outlet vents on kick plate of third seat row ⇒
Heating, ventilation, air conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .
– Lift up floor covering.

12. Entry and start authorisation (KESSY) 173


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release connector -1- and disconnect.


– Detach adhesive on interior aerial 2 for access and start au‐
thorisation - R139- -2- and remove aerial from vehicle.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Bond new aerial using new adhesive pad exactly in same po‐
sition and with same alignment to old aerial.

12.4.6 Removing and installing interior aerial 1


for entry and start authorisation - R138-
The interior aerial 1 for entry and start authorisation - R138- is
located in front of the gear lever, under the front section of the
centre console.

Note

Further coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if


the interior aerial 1 for entry and start authorisation - R138- is
renewed. Erase the fault entry created in the fault memory via
“Guided fault finding” with vehicle diagnostic tester .

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove centre console cover ⇒ General body repairs, inte‐
rior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trims; Removing
and installing centre console cover .
– Pull interior aerial 1 for access and start authorisation - R138-
-1- vertically upwards out of its attachment, taking lengths of
connected wires into consideration.
– Separate connector -arrow- and remove interior aerial 1 for
access and start authorisation - R138- -1- from vehicle.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

12.5 Removing and installing rear lid power opening sender -G750- / -G760-

174 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers.
– Disengage ignition key in position 0 (locked).
– Remove rear bumper ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 63 ; Rear bumper; Removing and installing rear bumper .
– Release and disconnect connectors -3- and -4-.
– Unscrew bolt -2-.
– Pull control unit for rear lid power opening sender -1- off spoil‐
er.
– Release cable ties -5-, and remove sensor wires for rear lid
power opening sender.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– If necessary, renew cable ties.
– Tighten bolt -2- to 2.2 Nm ± 0.4 Nm.
– Ensure that connectors are securely engaged.

12. Entry and start authorisation (KESSY) 175


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

12.6 Starter button - E378-


On vehicles with KESSY, the starter button - E378- is installed
instead of the ignition/starter switch and controls without a key the
functions of the lock. The starter button - E378- is installed in
centre console in front of gear lever.

12.6.1 Removing and installing the starter but‐


ton - E378-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers.
– Remove centre console upper part ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trims; Re‐
moving and installing centre console cover .
– Release both locking lugs -arrows- and push out starter button
- E378- through the cover.

176 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release and separate connector -1- and remove starter button


- E378- -2-.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

When installing start button - E378- , ensure that it engages se‐


curely in the centre console.

12. Entry and start authorisation (KESSY) 177


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

13 Parking aid (PDC)

13.1 General description

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011
The Sharan has an 8 channel parking aid with 4 ultrasonic sen‐
sors (parking aid senders) in the rear bumper and 4 ultrasonic
sensors in the front bumper.
The parking aid system monitors the surrounding area via the ul‐
trasonic sensors in the front and rear bumpers. The acoustic
distance warning is provided by two warning buzzers in the vehi‐
cle interior.
The rear sensors are switched off automatically when a trailer is
hitched to the vehicle and the connector is plugged into the trailer
socket. The front sensors remain active.
The 8 channel parking aid comprises the following components:
♦ Park assist steering control unit - J791-
♦ Front left parking aid sender - G255-
♦ Front inner left parking aid sender - G254-
♦ Front inner right parking aid sender - G253-
♦ Front right parking aid sender - G252-
♦ Rear left parking aid sender - G203-
♦ Rear centre left parking aid sender - G204-
♦ Rear centre right parking aid sender - G205-
♦ Rear right parking aid sender - G206-
♦ Parking aid loudspeaker - R169-
♦ Rear parking aid loudspeaker - R194-
♦ Parking aid button - E266-
♦ Parking aid warning lamp - K136-
♦ Button illumination bulb - L76-
Function:
To switch on, press, with ignition on, parking aid button - E266-
or engage reverse gear. To switch off, press parking aid button -
E266- again (warning lamp in button goes out) or drive forwards
with a speed over about 15 km/h.
A brief audible signal is given and the warning lamp lights up when
the parking aid system is ready. If a fault is detected, a continuous
audible signal is given for 5 seconds and the parking aid warning
lamp flashes.
The intervals between the warning signals become proportionally
shorter as the distance decreases. At distances of less than 30 cm
the warning signals merge into a continuous tone. Special situa‐
tion: reversing parallel to a wall = no signal.

178 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Fault detection and fault display:


The park assist steering control unit - J791- controls the functions
of the parking aid.
The park assist steering control unit - J791- is equipped with self-
diagnosis, which makes fault finding easier.
For fault finding, use the systems described in chapter “Vehicle
diagnosis, testing and information system” in “Guided Fault Find‐
ing” mode ⇒ page 265 .
Perform final control diagnosis to check parking aid.

13.2 Assembly overview - parking aid

1 - Park assist steering control


unit - J791-
❑ Located above relay
carrier in driver's foot‐
well
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 191
❑ Adapting lower volume
request ⇒ page 180
❑ Adapting parking aid
display ⇒ page 180
❑ Adapting parking aid ac‐
tivation sound
⇒ page 180
❑ Can be checked via final
control diagnosis
❑ Tightening torque:
1.5 Nm
2 - Rear parking aid loud‐
speaker - R194-
❑ Located on rear left
wheel housing
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 187
❑ Adapting rear parking
aid warning speaker vol‐
ume ⇒ page 188
❑ Can be checked via final
control diagnosis
3 - Parking aid senders in rear
bumper cover
❑ Rear left parking aid
sender - G203-
❑ Rear centre left parking
aid sender - G204-
❑ Rear centre right parking aid sender - G205-
❑ Rear right parking aid sender - G206-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 184
❑ Checking ⇒ page 185
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 186
4 - Parking aid loudspeaker - R169-
❑ Located on relay carrier in driver's footwell
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 186

13. Parking aid (PDC) 179


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018
❑ Adapting front parking aid loudspeaker ⇒ page 188
❑ Can be checked via final control diagnosis
5 - Parking aid senders in front bumper cover
❑ Front left parking aid sender - G255-
❑ Front inner left parking aid sender - G254-
❑ Front inner right parking aid sender - G253-
❑ Front right parking aid sender - G252-
❑ Removing and installing front parking aid senders ⇒ page 181
❑ Checking ⇒ page 183
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 186
6 - Parking aid button - E266-
❑ Located in centre console in front of gear lever
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 188

13.3 Park assist steering control unit - J791-


The park assist steering control unit - J791- controls the parking
aid functions and is installed above the relay carrier in the driver
footwell.

13.3.1 Removing and installing park assist


steering control unit - J791-
Removing and installing park assist steering control unit - J791-
⇒ page 191 .

13.3.2 Coding park assist steering control unit


- J791-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

13.3.3 Pin assignment of park assist steering


control unit - J791-
Pin assignment ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding
and Fitting locations.

13.3.4 Adapting lower volume request


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

13.3.5 Adapting parking aid display


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

13.3.6 Adapting parking aid activation sound


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

13.4 Front parking aid senders


The following parking aid senders are located in the front bumper
cover:
♦ Front left parking aid sender - G255-
♦ Front inner left parking aid sender - G254-
♦ Front inner right parking aid sender - G253-
♦ Front right parking aid sender - G252-
Removing and installing front parking aid senders ⇒ page 181

180 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

13.4.1 Removing and installing front parking


aid senders

Note

Removal of the four front parking aid senders is carried out in the
same way and is only described as follows for one sender.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

Caution

♦ The order for removing the senders must be adhered to


under all circumstances.
♦ The sender may otherwise be damaged. Fractures may
occur if too much pressure is applied to the sender, and
this may cause the sender to fail.
♦ First remove sender from bracket and then disconnect
sender connector.

– Push fasteners -arrows- on sender bracket -1- outwards.

– Pull out sender -2- with wiring connected backwards from


sender retainer -1-.

Note

♦ When removing the sender, ensure the isolation ring (black


silicone ring) remains on the sender head and does not remain
stuck in the bracket or become lost.
♦ Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all cir‐
cumstances.

13. Parking aid (PDC) 181


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release and separate connector -2- and remove sender -1-.


Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Caution

♦ Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all


circumstances.
♦ Function problems could occur if an incorrect or damaged
isolation ring is used.
♦ Renew damaged isolation rings and always ensure that
the correct isolation ring is fitted.

Note

As the front parking aid sender and the park assist steering send‐
ers have sender heads of different lengths, isolation rings of
different heights are also installed.

– Check whether the correct isolation ring is installed on the re‐


spective sender head.
Type of sender Isolation ring height dimen‐
sion -B-
Front parking aid senders 5.7 mm
Park assist steering senders 9.05 mm
– Renew isolation ring -1- of sender if necessary.
– Assign sender to correct installation position in bumper cover.

Note

♦ Senders are available in different forms and must be assigned


to respective fitting location in bumper cover.
♦ When installing senders, note position of electrical connec‐
tions of senders.

182 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Assignment of parking aid sender on inside of rear bumper cover:


A - Left outer
B - left centre
C - right centre
D - Right outer

Note

♦ When installing the sender, ensure that the isolation ring is


correctly mounted on the sender head and does not ride or roll
up on insertion into the sender retainer.
♦ Both locking lugs of sender retainer must audibly engage
when installing the sender.

– After installing the sender, check that the sender is correctly


seated in the bracket. Visible on the outer side of the bumper,
dimension -a- of the ring gap between the sender head and
bumper cover must be even all around.

13.4.2 Checking front parking aid sender


This function can be used to check the following components via
the parking aid control unit :
♦ Front left parking aid sender - G255-
♦ Front inner left parking aid sender - G254-
♦ Front inner right parking aid sender - G253-
♦ Front right parking aid sender - G252-
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ page 265 .
– Select “Guided fault finding” mode in vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Using the “GoTo” button, select “Function/component selec‐
tion” and the following menu items in succession:
♦ Body
♦ General body repairs
♦ Diagnostic capable systems
♦ Parking aid II
♦ Electrical components of parking aid II
♦ Parking aid sender, park assist steering sender

13.5 Rear parking aid senders


The following parking aid senders are located in the rear bumper
cover:
♦ Rear left parking aid sender - G203-

13. Parking aid (PDC) 183


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Rear centre left parking aid sender - G204-


♦ Rear centre right parking aid sender - G205-
♦ Rear right parking aid sender - G206-
Removing and installing rear parking aid senders ⇒ page 184

13.5.1 Removing and installing rear parking aid


senders
Removing:

Note

The removal of the four rear parking aid senders is carried out in
the same way and is only described for one sender in the follow‐
ing.

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove rear bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 63 ; Rear bumper .

Caution

♦ The order for removing the senders must be adhered to


under all circumstances.
♦ The sender may otherwise be damaged. Fractures may
occur if too much pressure is applied to the sender, and
this may cause the sender to fail.
♦ First remove sender from bracket and then disconnect
sender connector.

– Push fasteners -arrows- on sender bracket -1- outwards.


– Pull out sender -2- with wiring connected backwards from
sender retainer -1-.

Note

♦ When removing the sender, ensure the isolation ring (black


silicone ring) remains on the sender head and does not remain
stuck in the bracket or become lost.
♦ Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all cir‐
cumstances.

184 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release and separate connector -2- and remove sender -1-.


Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Caution

♦ Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all


circumstances.
♦ Function problems may occur if a damaged isolation ring
is used.
♦ Renew damaged isolation rings.

Note

♦ Senders are available in different forms and must be assigned


to respective fitting location in bumper cover.
♦ When installing senders, note position of electrical connec‐
tions of senders.

Assignment of parking aid senders on inside of rear bumper cov‐


er:
A - Right outer
B - right centre
C - left centre
D - Left outer

Note

♦ When installing the sender, ensure that the isolation ring is


correctly mounted on the sender head and does not ride or roll
up on insertion into the sender retainer.
♦ Both locking lugs of sender retainer must audibly engage
when installing the sender.

– After installing the sender, check that the sender is correctly


seated in the bracket. Visible on the outer side of the bumper,
dimension -a- of the ring gap between the sender head and
bumper cover must be even all around.

13.5.2 Checking rear parking aid senders


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

13. Parking aid (PDC) 185


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

13.6 Renewing parking aid senders


If a new parking aid sender is installed, the sender head must be
first painted in the colour of the bumper cover. The following pre‐
requisites must be adhered to when painting the senders to
ensure the function of the parking aid system is not adversely
affected.

13.6.1 Painting senders


– Remove isolation ring (black silicon ring) from new sender
head.
– Degrease black sender head -1- in area to be painted -2- with
isopropanol (isopropyl alcohol).
– Paint sender in area to be painted -2- in colour of bumper cov‐
er.

Note

Dimension -B- for the painted area must not exceed 3 mm (+


maximum 2 mm).

– Fit isolation ring (black silicone ring) on sender head again


once paint has dried.

Caution

♦ Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all


circumstances.
♦ Function problems may occur if a damaged isolation ring
is used.
♦ Renew damaged isolation rings.

13.7 Parking aid loudspeaker

13.7.1 Removing and installing parking aid


loudspeaker - R169-
The parking aid loudspeaker - R169- is located under the dash
panel in the driver's footwell and is secured on the console for
relay carrier above the onboard supply control unit.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Open and remove cover of fuse box in driver's footwell by
pushing locking mechanism to side ⇒ General body repair,
interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Stowage compartments, covers and
trims .

186 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Detach both spreader rivets -arrows-.


– Release and separate connector -1- and remove parking aid
loudspeaker - R169- -2- from console of relay carrier.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

Note

Coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if the park‐
ing aid loudspeaker - R169- is renewed.

13.7.2 Removing and installing rear parking aid


loudspeaker - R194-
The rear parking aid loudspeaker - R194- is located on the rear
left wheel housing. Depending on the equipment level, the rear
parking aid loudspeaker - R194- is either secured with spreader
rivets or on vehicles with reversing camera system on the bracket
for the reversing camera system control unit.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove left side panel trim in luggage compartment ⇒ Gen‐
eral body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Pillars and side panel
trim; Removing and installing side panel trim .
Vehicles equipped with reversing camera system:
– Push together retainers -arrows- and remove rear parking aid
loudspeaker - R194- -2- upwards from bracket.
Vehicles not equipped with reversing camera system:

– Detach spreader rivets -arrows- and remove rear parking aid


loudspeaker - R194- -2-.
Continued for all vehicles:
– Release and separate connector -1- and remove rear parking
aid loudspeaker - R194- -2-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

Note

Coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if the rear
parking aid loudspeaker - R194- is renewed.

13. Parking aid (PDC) 187


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

13.7.3 Adapting loudspeaker for parking aid -


R169-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

13.8 Parking aid button - E266-


The parking aid button - E266- is located in the centre console in
front of the gear lever.

13.8.1 Removing and installing parking aid but‐


ton - E266-
Removal and installation of the parking aid button - E266- is car‐
ried out in the same way for all other buttons in the centre console
stowage compartment.
– Removing and installing parking aid button - E266-
⇒ page 249

188 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

14 Park assist steering (PAS)

14.1 General description

Note

♦ When handling complaints, it is essential to understand the


function and operation of the park assist steering.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Owner's manual

The park assist steering supports the driver when reversing into
a parallel parking space on the driver or passenger side. When
the park assist steering is activated and the vehicle drives by at
a speed of less than 35 km/h, the side of the road is measured by
ultrasonic sensors searching for a suitable parking space. Once
a parking space has been reliably detected, the park assist steer‐
ing requests the driver to continue passing by the parking space
until the vehicle is in a position from which rapid parking is pos‐
sible. When reverse gear is engaged, the park assist steering
undertakes lateral guidance of the vehicle by actuating the EPS
(electronic power steering) and steers the vehicle into the parking
space in one movement along a calculated, nominal path. The
driver maintains operation of the pedals (accelerator, clutch,
brake) and longitudinal vehicle guidance, and therefore deter‐
mines the parking speed. During the parking process, the park
assist steering sensors are used together with the parking aid
senders to monitor proximity.
The following conditions lead to abortion of the parking process
with the park assist steering:
♦ The park assist steering is switched off via the park assist
steering button - E581- .
♦ Ignition is switched off
♦ Parking speed too high (>7 km/h)
♦ Steering intervention by driver during parking process
♦ Disengagement of reverse gear
♦ Vehicle standstill time limit exceeded (approx. 30 s)
♦ ESP switched off or ESP intervention
♦ TCS intervention
♦ Trailer attached to vehicle coupling
♦ Parking aid (PDC) is switched on
♦ Sensors detect a status which endangers secure determina‐
tion of the vehicle position.
♦ System malfunction

14. Park assist steering (PAS) 189


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

WARNING

♦ Responsibility during parking is borne by the driver.


♦ The park assist steering cannot replace the driver's atten‐
tiveness.
♦ The sensors have blind spots, in which persons and ob‐
jects can not be registered.
♦ Pay particular attention to small children and animals, as
these are not always detected by the sensors.

The park assist steering consists of:


♦ Park assist steering control unit - J791-
♦ Front left sender for park assist steering on left side of vehicle
- G568-
♦ Front right sender for park assist steering on right side of ve‐
hicle - G569-
♦ Rear left park assist steering sender - G716-
♦ Rear right park assist steering sender - G717-
♦ Front left parking aid sender - G255-
♦ Front inner left parking aid sender - G254-
♦ Front inner right parking aid sender - G253-
♦ Front right parking aid sender - G252-
♦ Front parking aid warning buzzer - H22-
♦ Park assist steering button - E581-
♦ Warning light for park assist steering - K241-
♦ Button illumination bulb - L76-
Fault detection and fault display:
The park assist steering features self-diagnosis to facilitate fault
finding.
For fault finding, use vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system in “Guided fault finding” mode.
To check the park assist steering as a whole, perform final control
diagnosis.

14.2 Assembly overview of park assist steering

190 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Park assist steering control


unit - J791-
❑ Located above relay
carrier in driver's foot‐
well
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 191
❑ Coding ⇒ page 192
❑ Specified torque:
1.5 Nm
2 - Rear parking aid loud‐
speaker - R194-
❑ Located on rear left
wheel housing
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 197
❑ Can be checked via final
control diagnosis
3 - Rear park assist steering
senders
❑ Located in rear bumper
cover
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 194
❑ Checking ⇒ page 196
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 196
4 - Parking aid loudspeaker -
R169-
❑ In driver's footwell, on
relay carrier of dash
panel ⇒ page 197
5 - Front park assist steering
senders
❑ Located in front bumper cover
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 193
❑ Checking ⇒ page 196
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 196
6 - Parking aid button - E266-
❑ Located in centre console stowage compartment, in front of gear lever
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 197
❑ Checking ⇒ page 197

14.3 Park assist steering control unit - J791-


The park assist steering control unit - J791- is located in the driver
footwell, above the relay carrier. In vehicles with parking aid, the
parking aid functions are simultaneously controlled by the park
assist steering control unit .

14.3.1 Removing and installing park assist


steering control unit - J791-
The park assist steering control unit - J791- is located in the driver
footwell, above the relay carrier.

14. Park assist steering (PAS) 191


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove footwell trim on driver side ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trims .
– Remove left air vent from dash panel ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Removing and installing dash panel .
– Unscrew securing bolt from underneath -arrow- on park assist
steering control unit above relay carrier.

– Release and separate three connectors -arrows- and remove


park assist steering control unit - J791- -1- from relay carrier.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Tighten securing bolt of park assist steering control unit - J791-
to 1.5 Nm.

14.3.2 Coding park assist steering control unit


- J791-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

14.3.3 Adaptation
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

14.4 Park assist steering senders


Park assist steering senders are installed in front and rear bumper
cover. The park assist steering senders are each mounted at the
outermost, lateral positions of the bumper cover, and are used to
measure proximity during the parking process, together with the
parking aid senders.
The following park assist steering senders are located in the front
bumper cover:
♦ Front left sender for park assist steering on left side of vehicle
- G568-
♦ Front right sender for park assist steering on right side of ve‐
hicle - G569-
The following park assist steering senders are located in the rear
bumper cover:
♦ Rear left park assist steering sender - G716-

192 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Rear right park assist steering sender - G717-

14.4.1 Removing and installing front park as‐


sist steering senders
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 63 ; Front bumper .

Caution

♦ The order for removing the senders must be adhered to


under all circumstances.
♦ The sender may otherwise be damaged. Fractures may
occur if too much pressure is applied to the sender, and
this may cause the sender to fail.
♦ First remove sender from bracket and then disconnect
sender connector.

– Push fasteners -arrows- on sender bracket -1- outwards.


– Pull out sender -2- with wiring connected backwards from
sender holder.

Note

♦ When removing the sender, make sure that the isolation ring
(black silicone ring) on the sender head does not remain in the
bracket or become lost.
♦ Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all cir‐
cumstances.

– Release and separate connector -2- and remove sender -1-.


Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Caution

Function problems could occur if an incorrect or damaged iso‐


lation ring is used.
Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all circum‐
stances.
Renew damaged isolation rings and always ensure that the
correct isolation ring is fitted.

Note

As the parking aid senders and the park assist steering senders
have sender heads of different lengths, isolation rings of different
heights are also installed.

14. Park assist steering (PAS) 193


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Check whether the correct isolation ring is installed on the


sender head.
Type of sender Isolation ring height dimen‐
sion -B-
Front parking aid senders 5.7 mm
Park assist steering senders 9.05 mm
– Renew isolation ring -1- of sender if necessary.

Note

When installing senders, note position of electrical connections


of senders.

Assignment of senders on inside of front bumper cover:


A - Bracket for front left sender for Park Assist on left side of ve‐
hicle - G568-
B - Bracket for front right sender for Park Assist on right side of
vehicle - G569-

Note

♦ When installing the sender, ensure that the isolation ring is


correctly mounted on the sender head and does not ride or roll
up on insertion into the sender retainer.
♦ Both locking lugs of sender bracket must audibly engage when
installing the sender.

– After installing the sender, check that the sender is correctly


seated in the bracket. Visible on the outer side of the bumper,
dimension -a- of the ring gap between the sender head and
bumper cover must be even all around.

14.4.2 Removing and installing rear park assist


steering sender
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove rear bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 63 ; Rear bumper .

194 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Caution

♦ The order for removing the senders must be adhered to


under all circumstances.
♦ The sender may otherwise be damaged. Fractures may
occur if too much pressure is applied to the sender, and
this may cause the sender to fail.
♦ First remove sender from bracket and then disconnect
sender connector.

– Push fasteners -arrows- on sender bracket -1- outwards.


– Pull out sender -2- with wiring connected backwards from
sender holder.

Note

♦ When removing the sender, make sure that the isolation ring
(black silicone ring) on the sender head does not remain in the
bracket or become lost.
♦ Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all cir‐
cumstances.

– Release and separate connector -2- and remove sender -1-.


Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Caution

Function problems could occur if an incorrect or damaged iso‐


lation ring is used.
Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all circum‐
stances.
Renew damaged isolation rings and always ensure that the
correct isolation ring is fitted.

Note

As the parking aid senders and the park assist steering senders
have sender heads of different lengths, isolation rings of different
heights are also installed.

14. Park assist steering (PAS) 195


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Check whether the correct isolation ring is installed on the


sender head.
Type of sender Isolation ring height dimen‐
sion -B-
Front parking aid senders 5.7 mm
Park assist steering senders 9.05 mm
– Renew isolation ring -1- of sender if necessary.

Note

When installing senders, note position of electrical connections


of senders.

Assignment of senders on inside of rear bumper cover:


A - Bracket for rear right park assist steering sender - G717-
B - Bracket for rear left park assist steering sender - G716-

Note

♦ When installing the sender, ensure that the isolation ring is


correctly mounted on the sender head and does not ride or roll
up on insertion into the sender retainer.
♦ Both locking lugs of sender bracket must audibly engage when
installing the sender.

– After installing the sender, check that the sender is correctly


seated in the bracket. Visible on the outer side of the bumper,
dimension -a- of the ring gap between the sender head and
bumper cover must be even all around.

14.4.3 Checking parking aid sender and park


assist steering sender
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

14.5 Renewing park assist steering senders


If a new park assist steering sender is installed, the sender head
must be first painted in the colour of the bumper cover. The fol‐
lowing prerequisites must be adhered to when painting the send‐
ers to ensure the function of the park assist steering system is not
adversely affected.

14.5.1 Painting senders


– Remove isolation ring (black silicon ring) from new sender
head.

196 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Degrease black sender head -1- in area to be painted -2- with


isopropanol (isopropyl alcohol).
– Paint sender in area to be painted -2- in colour of bumper cov‐
er.

Note

Dimension -B- for the painted area must not exceed 3 mm (+


maximum 2 mm).

– Fit isolation ring (black silicone ring) on sender head again


once paint has dried.

Caution

♦ Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all


circumstances.
♦ Function problems may occur if a damaged isolation ring
is used.
♦ Renew damaged isolation rings.

14.6 Park assist steering loudspeaker


The park assist steering control unit - J791- controls the functions
of the parking aid and park assist steering system. The acoustic
warning messages of the park assist steering system are given
via the parking aid warning buzzer ( parking aid loudspeaker -
R169- and rear parking aid loudspeaker - R194- ).
Removal and installation and adaption options for the parking aid
loudspeaker are described in the chapter entitled parking aid
⇒ “13.7 Parking aid loudspeaker”, page 186 .

14.7 Park assist steering button - E581-


The park assist steering button - E581- is located in the centre
console storage compartment in front of the gear lever. The park
assist steering button - E581- cannot be dismantled again.

14.7.1 Removing and installing park assist


steering button - E581-
Removal and installation of the park assist steering button - E581-
is carried out in the same way for all other buttons in the centre
console stowage compartment
⇒ “8.1 Buttons in centre console storage compartment”,
page 249 .

14.7.2 Checking park assist steering button -


E581-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

14. Park assist steering (PAS) 197


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

15 Reversing camera system

15.1 General description

Note

♦ When handling complaints, it is essential to understand the


function and operation of the reversing camera system.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual
♦ In the event of repair work or fault finding, use “Guided fault
finding” mode, ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding
and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check operation of electrical
equipment (radio, clock, convenience electronics and so on)
according to the workshop manual and/or the operating man‐
ual.

The reversing camera system supports the driver during revers‐


ing by providing the driver with an image of the traffic situation
behind the vehicle via the radio or radio navigation system dis‐
play.
The system is activated when reverse gear is engaged, even if
the radio or radio navigation system is switched off.
The reversing camera system consists of the following compo‐
nents:
♦ Reversing camera - R189-
♦ Reversing camera system control unit - J772-
♦ Control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-

Note

Installation of an additional number plate carrier is not permissible


on vehicles with reversing camera system as this would impair
the function of the reversing camera. The light of the number plate
could also be impaired.

Fault detection and fault display:


The reversing camera system is equipped with self-diagnosis.
For fault finding, use vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system - VAS 5051A- or vehicle diagnosis and service information
system - VAS 5052- in “Guided fault finding” mode.

15.2 Assembly overview - reversing camera system

198 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Control unit with display unit


for radio and navigation - J503-
❑ Location: at front in cen‐
tre console
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ Communication;
Rep. gr. 91
2 - Reversing camera - R189-
❑ Location: in handle but‐
ton of rear lid
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 199
❑ Specified torque for se‐
curing nuts: 6 Nm
❑ Calibrating reversing
camera system
⇒ page 200
3 - Reversing camera system
control unit - J772-
❑ Located behind side
panel trim on left in lug‐
gage compartment
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 200
❑ Calibrating reversing
camera system
⇒ page 200

15.3 Removing and installing reversing cam‐


era
The reversing camera is installed in the handle button of the rear
lid. The handle button must not be dismantled. In the event of
damage, the complete handle button with reversing camera must
be renewed. The reversing camera system must be recalibrated
after reinstallation of the camera ⇒ page 200 .

15.3.1 Removing handle button with reversing


camera from rear lid
Remove handle button ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 55 ; Rear lid; Removing and installing handle with button for
release .

15. Reversing camera system 199


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

15.4 Reversing camera system control unit -


J772-

15.4.1 Removing and installing reversing cam‐


era system control unit - J772-
Control unit is installed in luggage compartment behind left side
panel trim.
Removing:

Note

If the reversing camera system control unit - J772- is to be re‐


placed, the procedure to “renew control unit for reversing camera
system” must always be performed to read out the codes stored
in the unit ⇒ page 200 .

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove storage compartment in left side panel trim in luggage
compartment ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ;
Pillars and side panel trim; Removing and installing side panel
trim .
– Release connector -1- and disconnect.
– Push retainers -arrows- outwards and swing out control unit
for reversing camera system - J772- -2- from bracket.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.
Only if reversing camera system control unit - J772- has been
renewed:
– Recalibrate reversing camera system ⇒ page 200 .

15.4.2 Renewing reversing camera system


control unit - J772-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

15.4.3 Coding reversing camera system con‐


trol unit - J772-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

15.5 Calibrating reversing camera system


Reversing camera system may have to be recalibrated following
repair work on the vehicle. More specifically, this is necessary
after:
♦ Removing and installing reversing camera
♦ Renewing reversing camera system control unit
♦ Accident repairs on rear lid
♦ After vehicle alignment
♦ Repairs to front or rear axle

200 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Extensive preliminary work is required before actual calibration


can be carried out using vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system - VAS 5051A- or vehicle diagnosis and service information
system - VAS 5052- . This is described in the following.
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Calibration unit - VAS 6350-

15.5.1 Preparatory work for calibration:


To carry out calibration, vehicle must be positioned on a firm, level
surface. Nobody may be inside vehicle during measurement. Ve‐
hicle must not be moved during measurement, and opening and
closing vehicle doors is prohibited.
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .
– Set steering wheel sender - G85- to 0 position (wheels straight
ahead).
Overview of assembled measuring facility:

15. Reversing camera system 201


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Wheel centre mounting -


VAS 6350/1-
2 - Wheel centre mounting -
VAS 6350/1-
3 - Right angle for mounting
measuring unit for distance
measurement
4 - Plastic foot
❑ Total of 3 on bottom of
measuring equipment
❑ Adjustable to adjust hor‐
izontal position of meas‐
uring facility
5 - Linear laser - VAS 6350/3-
❑ Switching on and off ⇒
Owner's manual
6 - Spacing laser - VAS
6350/2-
❑ Notes on operation ⇒
Owner's manual
7 - Spirit level on measuring fa‐
cility
❑ To check horizontal po‐
sition of measuring fa‐
cility
8 - Left angle for mounting
measuring unit for distance
measurement
9 - Calibration unit - VAS 6350-
❑ Distance between angle
brackets of calibration
device
( ⇒ Item 3 (page 202) or
⇒ Item 8 (page 202) )
and paddles on wheel
centre mountings of rear wheels: 1.40 m -dimension A-.

– Secure a wheel bolt adapter (17 mm AF) in each of the 3 holes


in hole circle “112” of wheel centre mounting.
– Place the paddles on the two wheel centre mountings and se‐
cure with the clamping nuts.

202 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Fit the wheel centre mountings onto the wheel bolts on the rear
wheels. Wheel centre mountings are positioned and secured
in the adapters through »O-rings«.

Note

Place wheel centre mountings on wheels in such a way that no


»anti-theft wheel bolts«, if any, are connected to wheel bolt adapt‐
ers.

– Set paddles with the help of the clamping nuts in such a way
that they can move freely just above the floor.
Make sure the paddles can move freely.
– Position the calibration device - VAS 6350/4- behind the ve‐
hicle at a distance of approx. 1.40 m - 1.90 m between the
angle brackets of the calibration device and the paddles on the
wheel centre mountings, as shown in the overview diagram
-dimension A- ⇒ Item 9 (page 202) .

– Bring calibration device - VAS 6350/4- into the horizontal po‐


sition. Do this by turning the plastic feet under the calibration
unit until the air bubble in the spirit level is precisely in the
centre of the indicator -arrow-.

– Switch on laser on calibration unit -1- and align the entire cal‐
ibration unit so that the laser beam hits the rear end of the
vehicle centrally above the VW emblem.

– Switch on the linear laser - VAS 6350/2- for distance meas‐


urement by pressing the ON button. The following display
appears and the laser is activated:

15. Reversing camera system 203


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Hold spacing laser for distance measurement -2- as shown in


illustration flush against bracket on one side of calibration unit
so that spacing laser lies firmly against bracket.

– Ensure that laser beam from spacing laser for distance meas‐
urement hits lower, enlarged part of paddle -1-.
If this is not the case, adjust paddles accordingly on wheel mount‐
ing using clamping bolts.

– Hold distance spacing laser for distance measurement in


bracket on measuring device whilst laser beam is visible on
paddle. Now, briefly press ON button to measure distance. The
following appears in the display:
The distance is shown on the display in “metres”.
– Make a note of the distance.
– Repeat measuring process in same manner for other rear
wheel on other side of calibration unit.
Measured distance value must be identical on both sides. If value
is not identical, adjust calibration unit until values on both sides
are identical.
When adjusting the calibration unit, ensure that the laser beam of
the spacing laser continues to hit the vehicle centrally above the
VW logo and that the spirit level indicator remains in the centre.
If necessary, readjust accordingly.
The measured distance must be entered during calibration in ve‐
hicle diagnosis, testing and information system - VAS 5051A- or
vehicle diagnosis and service information system - VAS 5052- in
“millimetres”.
Calibrating reversing camera system ⇒ page 204

15.5.2 Calibrating reversing camera system

Note

Note the points regarding preparatory work for calibration


⇒ page 201 .

⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

204 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

15.6 Renewing video cable


⇒ “15.6.1 Preparation”, page 205
⇒ “15.6.2 Routing repair cable”, page 205
⇒ “15.6.3 Renewing video cable connector strip”, page 207

15.6.1 Preparation

Note

It is not permitted to repair the video cable. The cable may be


renewed only.

The replacement cable can be found in ⇒ ETKA under part num‐


ber “7N1971327”.
– Remove radio ⇒ Rep. gr. 91 ; Radio; Removing and installing
radio .
– Remove glove compartment ⇒ Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments
and covers; Removing and installing glove compartment .
– Remove lower A-pillar trim ⇒ Rep. gr. 70 ; Trim; Assembly
overview - A-pillar trim .
– Remove front and rear sill panel mouldings ⇒ Rep. gr. 70 ;
Trim; Removing and installing sill panel moulding .
– Remove lower B-pillar trim ⇒ Rep. gr. 70 ; Trim; Assembly
overview - B-pillar trim .
– Remove left luggage compartment side trim ⇒ Rep. gr. 70 ;
Luggage compartment trims; Removing and installing luggage
compartment side trim .

15.6.2 Routing repair cable

Note

It is not permitted to repair the video cable. The cable may be renewed only.

Caution

When routing the cable, ensure that it is not kinked and that it
does not rub anywhere.

– Switch off ignition.


– Position 26-pin connector of repair cable near radio.

15. Reversing camera system 205


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Note

Ensure that the cable is sufficiently long to permit later installation


and removal of the radio.

– Route repair cable -1- directly from radio slot towards left A-
pillar.
– Secure cable to dash panel cross member using cable ties.
– Secure cable at top of A-pillar -2- using cable ties.
– Guide through lower section of A-pillar.
– Route cable parallel to main wiring harness and fix it in place.

Caution

When routing the cable, ensure that it is not kinked and that it
does not rub anywhere.

206 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

15.6.3 Renewing video cable connector strip


– Separate old 54-pin connector from reversing camera system
control unit - J772- .
– Open old 54-pin connector and remove video cable.
– Open new 54-pin connector and remove video cable connec‐
tor strip.
– Insert new video cable connector strip in old connector and
assemble connector housing.
– Connect connector to reversing camera system control unit -
J772- .
– Coil excess length of cable and secure to main wiring harness.
– Shorten defective video cable and wrap it in main wiring har‐
ness.
– Perform functional check.
– Read fault memory and clear it.

15. Reversing camera system 207


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

16 Lane departure warning


⇒ “16.1 Assembly overview - lane departure warning”,
page 208
⇒ “16.2 General description”, page 208
⇒ “16.3 Removing and installing front camera for driver assist
systems R242 ”, page 209
⇒ “16.4 Removing and installing windscreen heater for front sen‐
sors Z113 ”, page 211

16.1 Assembly overview - lane departure warning

1 - Front camera for driver as‐


sist systems - R242-
❑ Fitting location: in interi‐
or mirror bracket
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 209
❑ Replacing front camera
for driver assist systems
⇒ page 211
❑ Coding front camera for
driver assist systems
⇒ page 211
❑ Calibrating front camera
for driver assist systems
⇒ page 209
2 - Windscreen heater for front
sensors - Z113-
❑ Fitting location: in interi‐
or mirror bracket
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 211
3 - Rain and light sensor -
G397-
❑ Fitting location: in interi‐
or mirror bracket
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 58
4 - Steering angle sender -
G85-
❑ Fitting location: in steer‐
ing column trim behind
steering wheel
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 137

16.2 General description

Note

♦ When handling complaints, it is essential to understand the


function and operation of the lane departure warning.
♦ Additional information:

208 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

⇒ Operating manual
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
Use ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided fault finding for re‐
pairs and troubleshooting.
Lane marking lines are recognised by a camera in the interior
mirror. If the vehicle approaches an recognised lane marking line,
the driver is informed that he is unintentionally leaving the lane.
This is done with a corrective steering intervention by the system
that helps to stay in lane.
The system is designed for driving on motorways and well devel‐
oped A roads. Therefore, the system only starts operation at
speeds above 65 km/h. If the lane departure warning system de‐
tects lane marking lines on both sides of the own driving lane, the
system is operational. This is indicated by the green warning lamp
in the dash panel insert. If, when the system is operational, you
switch the turn signal on before crossing a lane marking line, the
warning is suppressed as the system presumes that the lane
change is intentional.

Note

♦ The corrective steering intervention can, if necessary, be over‐


ridden by the driver.
♦ In driving situations that require a high level of attention from
the driver, we recommend switching the system off, e.g. dur‐
ing:
♦ Very sporty driving
♦ Poor weather conditions
♦ Poor road conditions or road works

16.3 Removing and installing front camera


for driver assist systems - R242-
Removing: ⇒ page 209
Installing: ⇒ page 210
Renewing front camera for driver assist systems: ⇒ page 211
Coding front camera for driver assist systems: ⇒ page 211
Calibrating front camera for driver assist systems: ⇒ page 211
Starter button - R242- is located in holder of interior mirror.

Note

If the front camera for driver assist systems - R242- is to be re‐


placed, the procedure for “replacing the front camera for driver
assist systems” must always be performed in order to read out
the codes stored in the unit ⇒ page 211 .

Removing:
– Remove interior mirror ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 68 ; Interior mirror; Removing and installing interior mirror .

16. Lane departure warning 209


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Push retaining clip -2- upwards.


– Carefully pull front camera for driver assist systems - R242-
towards rear out of mounting.
– Then pull front camera for driver assist systems - R242- out of
its left mounting towards the right, taking into account the
lengths of connected cables and wires.

– Release and detach connector -1- and remove front camera


for driver assist systems - R242- -2-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– Push connector onto front camera for driver assist systems -
R242- until it locks into place.

210 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Insert protrusion -2- on left side on front camera for driver as‐
sist systems - R242- into mounting -1- on carrier plate.
– Then, push front camera for driver assist systems - R242- on
the right-hand side into the retaining clip.
– Install interior mirror ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
68 ; Interior mirror; Removing and installing interior mirror .
– Calibrate front camera for driver assist systems ⇒ page 211 .
Renewing front camera for driver assist systems
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ page 265 .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Function/component selection”
and follow the instructions on the vehicle diagnostic tester .
Coding front camera for driver assist systems
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ page 265 .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Function/component selection”
and follow the instructions on the vehicle diagnostic tester .
Calibrating front camera for driver assist systems
Calibration of the front camera is necessary for the following rea‐
sons:
♦ “No or incorrect basic setting/adaption” entry stored in the
event memory.
♦ Lane departure warning control unit - J759- with camera has
been renewed.
♦ Windscreen has been renewed or removed.
♦ Rear axle toe has been adjusted.
♦ Modifications, which may affect vehicle height, have been per‐
formed on vehicle running gear.
♦ On vehicles with electronic damping control or air suspension
vehicle level senders have been renewed.
Calibrating front camera for driver assist systems - R242- : ⇒
Running gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 44 ; Front camera for
driver assist systems; Calibrating front camera for driver assist
systems .

16.4 Removing and installing windscreen


heater for front sensors - Z113-
The windscreen heater for front sensors - Z113- is integrated in
the carrier plate stuck on the windscreen and cannot be renewed
individually. In the event of damage, the windscreen must be re‐
newed ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 64 ; Wind‐
screen; Removing and installing windscreen .

16. Lane departure warning 211


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

96 – Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


1 Interior lights and switches

1.1 Interior monitoring deactivation switch -


E267- and deactivation button for vehi‐
cle inclination sender - E360-

1.1.1 Removing and installing interior moni‐


toring deactivation switch - E267- and
deactivation button for vehicle inclina‐
tion sender - E360-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

♦ The interior monitoring deactivation switch - E267- and the


deactivation button for vehicle inclination sender - E360- form
one component.
♦ The anti-theft alarm system must be deactivated before the
interior monitoring deactivation switch - E267- and the deac‐
tivation button for vehicle inclination sender - E360- can be
removed ⇒ page 260 .
♦ When removing and installing components that are in view
(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
tools ( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to
lever out those components using commercially available
tape.
♦ The interior monitoring deactivation switch - E267- and the
deactivation button for vehicle inclination sender - E360- are
located in the B-pillar trim on the driver side.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

212 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Carefully lever out the interior monitoring deactivation switch


- E267- and the deactivation button for vehicle inclination
sender - E360- -1- using the wedge - VAS 3409- or a suitable
screwdriver.

– Release and disconnect connector -arrow-.


Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

1. Interior lights and switches 213


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2 Lights and switches in engine com‐


partment

Note

There is no engine compartment lighting on the Sharan.

2.1 Removing and installing bonnet contact


switch - F266-
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove bonnet catch ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 55 ; Bonnet; Removing and installing lid lock .

Note

The Bowden cable can remain connected to the lid lock.

– Cut off cable tie -2-.


– Release locking lug -1- and move bonnet contact switch -
F266- in elongated holes until it can be removed.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

214 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3 Lights and switches in dash panel

3.1 Light switch - E1-


The following components are integrated into the light switch -
E1- :
♦ Fog light switch - E7-
♦ Rear fog light switch - E18-
♦ Bulb for illumination of light switch - L9-

3.1.1 Removing and installing light switch -


E1-
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Turn rotary knob part of light switch to “0”.
– Push in rotary light switch -1- -arrow A- and turn clockwise
slightly -arrow B-.
– Hold rotary switch in this position and pull out light unit -2- from
dash panel -arrow C-.

– Release and disconnect connector -arrow-.


Installing:
– Fit connector on light switch and engage.

– Hold light switch firmly in place, push in rotary grip of light


switch -1- and turn it slightly to the right -2-
– Hold rotary grip in this position and insert light switch in dash
panel -3-.
– Turn rotary grip to “0” position, release and engage switch.

3. Lights and switches in dash panel 215


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.2 Headlight range control regulator -


E102- and switch and instrument illumi‐
nation regulator - E20-

Note

The headlight range control regulator - E102- and the lighting,


switch and instrument regulator - E20- are a single component.

3.2.1 Removing and installing headlight range


control adjuster - E102- and switch and
instrument illumination regulator - E20-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove light switch ⇒ page 215
– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- and unclip switch trim -1- from
dash panel.

– Release and separate connector -arrow- and remove switch


trim -1-.

216 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release retainers -arrows- on both sides and push headlight


range adjuster - E102- and dimmer switch for switches and
instruments - E20- forwards out of switch trim.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

3.3 Glove compartment light - W6-


The glove compartment light - W6- is located in the front pas‐
senger's footwell, in the glove compartment.

3.3.1 Removing and installing glove compart‐


ment light - W6-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Open glove compartment.

3. Lights and switches in dash panel 217


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Carefully lever out glove compartment light - W6- -1- using


wedge - VAS 3409- or a suitable screwdriver.

– Release and detach connector -arrow- and remove glove


compartment light - W6- .
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Finally, check function of glove compartment switch. When the
lid is closed, the glove compartment light should not be on.

3.3.2 Renewing glove compartment light -


W6- bulb
Removing:
– Remove glove compartment light - W6- ⇒ page 217 .
– Release locking lugs -1- and remove heat shield -2- from light
lens.

– Carefully pry bulb out of bulb holder.


– Glass-base bulb: 12 V, 5 W
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

218 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.4 Hazard warning light switch - E3-


The hazard warning light switch - E3- is located in the centre of
the dash panel, below the radio unit or the radio navigation unit.

3.4.1 Removing and installing hazard warning


light switch - E3-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Carefully lever off cap -1- of hazard warning light switch on
both sides using a suitable flat tip screwdriver.

– Pull out hazard warning light switch - E3- -1- in a straight line
backwards from dash panel.

– Release and separate connector -arrow- and remove hazard


warning light switch - E3- -1-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

3. Lights and switches in dash panel 219


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3.4.2 Checking hazard warning light switch -


E3-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

3.5 Left footwell light - W9- and right footwell


light - W10-
The left footwell light - W9- can be found beneath the dash panel
in the driver's footwell. The right footwell light - W10- can be found
beneath the glove compartment.

Note

The illustrations show removal and installation of right footwell


light. The removal and installation of the left footwell light is carried
out in the same way.

3.5.1 Removing and installing footwell light

Note

♦ When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
tools ( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to
lever out those components using commercially available
tape.
♦ Removal and installation of both footwell lights is performed in
the same way and is described as follows for just one light.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

♦ When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
tools ( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to
lever out those components using commercially available
tape.
♦ Removal and installation of both footwell lights is performed in
the same way and is described as follows for just one light.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

220 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Use removal wedge - VAS 3409- or suitable screwdriver to


prise footwell light out of trim beneath glove compartment.

– Release and detach connector -arrow- and remove right foot‐


well light - W10- .
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

3.5.2 Renewing bulb of footwell light


Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

♦ When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
tools ( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to
lever out those components using commercially available
tape.
♦ Removal and installation of both footwell lights is performed in
the same way and is described as follows for just one light.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove footwell light ⇒ page 220 .

3. Lights and switches in dash panel 221


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release locking lugs -1- and remove heat shield -2- from light
lens.

– Carefully pry bulb out of bulb holder.


– Glass-base bulb: 12 V, 5 W
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

3.6 Key operated switch to deactivate front


passenger side airbag - E224-

WARNING

Observe safety precautions when working on airbag ⇒ Gen‐


eral body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Safety pre‐
cautions when working on airbag .

3.6.1 Removing and installing key-operated


switch to deactivate front passenger
side airbag - E224-

WARNING

♦ Danger of triggering of the airbag!


♦ Improper action on airbag unit may result in the triggering
of the airbag!
♦ Observe safety precautions when working on airbag ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Safety
precautions when working on airbag .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

222 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Open glove compartment.
– Insert ignition key -2- in front passenger side airbag deactiva‐
tion key switch - E224- -1- and carefully unlock the switch with
the ignition key in a vertical position on the right-hand side in
-direction of arrow-.

– Detach key switch for deactivating front passenger side airbag


- E224- -1- on left-hand side using removal wedge - VAS 3409-
-2-.

– Release and separate connector -2- and remove key switch


for deactivating front passenger airbag - E224- -1-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

3. Lights and switches in dash panel 223


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

4 Lights and switches in front doors

4.1 Driver side window regulator switch


module
The following components are integrated in the driver's window
regulator switch module:
♦ Front left window regulator switch - E40-
♦ Rear left window regulator switch in driver door - E53-
♦ Rear right window regulator switch in driver door - E55-
♦ Front right window regulator switch in driver door - E81-
♦ Childproof lock button - E318-
♦ Button illumination bulb - L76-

Note

The above mentioned components cannot be renewed individu‐


ally.

4.1.1 Removing and installing switch module


for driver side window regulator
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

224 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Carefully lever out mounting frame -1- backwards from door


panel trim using removal wedge - VAS 3409- -2- or suitable
screwdriver.

– Release and detach connectors -arrows- and remove mount‐


ing frame.

– Release locking lugs -arrows- and remove switch module for


window regulator from mounting frame.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

4.2 Mirror adjustment switch on passenger


side
The following components (depending on equipment) are inte‐
grated into the switch module for the mirror adjustment on the
driver side:
♦ Mirror adjustment switch - E43-
♦ Mirror adjustment changeover switch - E48-
♦ Exterior mirror heater button - E231-
♦ Fold-in mirror switch - E263-
♦ Mirror adjustment switch illumination bulb - L78-

Note

The above mentioned components cannot be renewed individu‐


ally.

4. Lights and switches in front doors 225


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

4.2.1 Removing and installing switch module


for mirror adjustment on driver side
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Carefully lever out mounting frame -1- backwards from door
panel trim using removal wedge - VAS 3409- -2- or suitable
screwdriver.

– Release and detach connectors -arrows- and remove mount‐


ing frame.

226 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release locking lugs -arrows- and remove switch module for


mirror adjustment upwards from mounting frame.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

4.3 Window regulator switch in front pas‐


senger door - E107-

4.3.1 Removing and installing window regula‐


tor switch in front passenger door -
E107-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

4. Lights and switches in front doors 227


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Carefully lever out mounting frame -1- backwards from door


panel trim using removal wedge - VAS 3409- -2- or suitable
screwdriver.

– Release and detach connector and remove mounting frame


-1-.

– Release locking lugs -arrows- and remove window regulator


switch in front passenger door - E107- -1- upwards from
mounting frame.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

4.4 Driver side interior locking button for


central locking system - E308-

4.4.1 Removing and installing driver side in‐


terior locking button for central locking
system - E308-
Special tools and workshop equipment required

228 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front door trim on driver side ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Removing and installing front door trim
on driver side .
– Carefully unclip decorative strip in door trim -1- using removal
wedge - VAS 3409- .

– Remove three securing bolts -1-, detach locking lugs


-arrows- and remove cover -2-.

4. Lights and switches in front doors 229


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Push out trim of inner door handle -1- from door panel, release
4 locking lugs -arrows- and push out inner door handle on
driver side - E308- -2- from door handle trim.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

4.5 Central locking SAFELOCK function


warning lamp - K133-
The central locking SAFELOCK function warning lamp - K133- is
located near the B-pillar in the driver's door trim.

4.5.1 Removing and installing Central locking


SAFELOCK function warning lamp -
K133-
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front door panel trim on driver side ⇒ General body
repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Door trims .
– Unclip central locking deadlock function warning lamp -SAFE-
- K133- -1- by pressing locking lugs together -arrows- and
remove from door trim panel.

– Pull off connector -1- and remove central locking SAFELOCK


function warning lamp - K133- -2-.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

Ensure, when installing, that the central locking SAFELOCK func‐


tion warning lamp - K133- engages properly in the door panel.

230 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

4.6 Door warning lamps

4.6.1 Removing and installing door warning


lamps

Note

Removal and installation of all door warning lights are performed


in the same manner and are described only for one light.

Door warning lamps:


♦ Driver side door warning lamp - W30 -
♦ Front passenger side door warning lamp - W36-

Caution

When removing and installing components in areas on view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
leverage tools (plastic wedge, screwdriver) are used to lever
out those components using commercially available adhesive
tape.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Carefully lever out door warning light -1- from trim on red side
of lens in area of retainers -arrows- using a screwdriver or re‐
moval wedge - VAS 3409- .

4. Lights and switches in front doors 231


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release and separate connector -1- and remove door warning


light -1-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

4.6.2 Replace door warning lamp bulbs

Caution

When removing and installing components in areas on view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
leverage tools (plastic wedge, screwdriver) are used to lever
out those components using commercially available adhesive
tape.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Removing:
– Remove door warning light ⇒ page 231 .
– Carefully unclip lens from bulb housing in area of catches
-arrows-.

232 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Pull out wedge-base bulb in -direction of arrow- in straight line


upwards from holder.
Glass-base bulb: 12 V, W 5 W
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

When fitting the lens to the light housing, make sure that all catch‐
es engage securely.

4. Lights and switches in front doors 233


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

5 Lights and switches in rear doors

5.1 Rear right window regulator button in


rear right door - E705- and rear left win‐
dow regulator button in rear left door -
E700-

5.1.1 Removing and installing rear right win‐


dow regulator button in rear right door -
E705- and rear left window regulator
button in rear left door - E700-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Removing:

Note

♦ When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
tools ( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to
lever out those components using commercially available
tape.
♦ Removal and installation of both footwell lights is performed in
the same way and is described as follows for just one light.

– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Carefully lever out window regulator button -1- from door panel
on front using removal wedge - VAS 3409- or a suitable screw‐
driver.

234 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release and separate connector -arrow- and remove button


-1-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

5. Lights and switches in rear doors 235


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

6 Lights and switches in luggage com‐


partment

6.1 Luggage compartment light - W3-


A luggage compartment light - W3- can be found in the left and
right side panel trim respectively in the luggage compartment.

6.1.1 Removing and installing luggage com‐


partment light - W3-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

♦ When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
tools ( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to
lever out those components using commercially available
tape.
♦ Removal and installation of the luggage compartment light is
described for the left-hand side only.
♦ Removal and installation of the luggage compartment light on
the right-hand side is basically the same.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Lever out light -1- from luggage compartment trim using re‐
moval wedge - VAS 3409- or screwdriver.

236 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release and separate connector -arrow- and remove luggage


compartment light - W3- .
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

6.1.2 Renewing luggage compartment light -


W3- bulb
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove luggage compartment light - W3- ⇒ page 236 .
– Remove contact plate -1- of light by pressing outwards and
remove festoon bulb -2- from bulb holder.
– Festoon bulb: 12 V, 10W
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

6. Lights and switches in luggage compartment 237


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

6.2 Rear lid lock unit - F256-


The rear lid locking unit - F256- is integrated into the rear lid lock
and cannot be renewed individually.

6.2.1 Removing and installing rear lid locking


unit - F256-
If the rear lid locking unit - F256- is found to be defective, the entire
rear lid lock must always be renewed.
– Renew rear lid lock ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr.
55 ; Lids, flaps; Removing and installing rear lid lock

6.3 Button to close rear lid in luggage com‐


partment - E406-
Rear lid closing button in luggage compartment - E406- is instal‐
led in bottom edge of rear lid.

6.3.1 Removing and installing button to close


rear lid in luggage compartment - E406-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Carefully lever out button from rear lid trim using removal
wedge - VAS 3409- or a suitable screwdriver.

238 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release and disconnect connector -arrow-.


– Remove button.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

6. Lights and switches in luggage compartment 239


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

7 Lights and switches in roof trim

7.1 Front interior light - W1-


The following components are integrated into the front interior
light - W1- :
♦ Driver side reading light - W19- ⇒ page 241
♦ Front passenger reading light - W13- ⇒ page 241
♦ Anti-theft alarm sensor - G578- ⇒ page 261
♦ Depending on equipment: sunroof button - E325-
⇒ page 242

7.1.1 Removing and installing front interior


light - W1-

Note

The following illustrations show removal and installation of the


front interior light - W1- on a vehicle with sliding/tilting sunroof.
Removal and installation of front interior light - W1- on vehicles
without sliding/tilting sunroof are carried out in the same way.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which tools
( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever out
those components using commercially available tape.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

240 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Lever off trim -1- at fasteners -arrows- using removal wedge -


VAS 3409- or suitable screwdriver.

– Remove both bolts -arrows- and swivel interior light out of roof
console.

– Dependant on equipment, release connectors -arrows-, dis‐


connect and remove interior light.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

7.1.2 Replacing front reading lights -W13- and


-W19-
Removing:
– Remove interior light ⇒ page 240 .
– Turn bulb holder -arrows- of defective reading lamp by 90° to
the left.
– Remove bulb holder together with bulb from reading light.

7. Lights and switches in roof trim 241


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Carefully pull glass-base bulb out of bulb holder.


– Glass-base bulb: 12 V, 5 W
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

7.1.3 Removing and installing front reading


lights button -E457- and -E458-

Note

♦ The driver side reading light button - E457- and the front pas‐
senger side reading light button - E458- cannot be renewed
individually.
♦ The complete component must be renewed in the event of re‐
pair.

7.1.4 Removing and installing sunroof button


- E325-
Removing:
– Remove interior light ⇒ page 240 .
– Release locking lugs -arrows- and remove button from mount‐
ing frame.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

– When inserting into trim, align sunroof button - E325- with lug
-1-.

242 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

7.2 Rear interior light - W43-

7.2.1 Removing and installing rear interior


light - W43-

Note

On vehicles with panoramic sunroof, the rear interior light - W43-


is located further back in the roof trim.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Release locking lugs -arrows- with removal wedge or appro‐
priate screwdriver and remove rear interior light - W43- from
headliner, taking connected wiring length into account.

– Release and detach connector -arrow- and remove rear inte‐


rior light - W43- .
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

7.2.2 Renewing bulb in rear interior light -


W43-

Note

The procedure for renewal of the bulbs in rear interior light is the
same for both bulbs and is therefore described for one side only.

Removing:
– Remove rear interior light - W43- ⇒ page 243 .

7. Lights and switches in roof trim 243


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release the four locking lugs -arrows- of light lens -1- and re‐
move lens from rear interior light by lifting it straight upwards.

– Remove bulb -1- from holder.


Rear interior light bulb: festoon bulb 12V, C5W
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

7.3 Left and right interior lights


♦ Right interior light - W17-
♦ Left interior light - W16-

7.3.1 Removing and installing left and right in‐


terior lights

Note

Removal and installation of the left and right interior lights is per‐
formed in the same manner and is therefore described for one
side only.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

244 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release retainer on front of interior light -1- using removal


wedge - VAS 3409- or a suitable screwdriver and remove in‐
terior light from roof trim, taking different lengths of connected
wiring into consideration.

– Release and separate connector -arrow- and remove interior


light -1-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

7.3.2 Renewing bulbs of left and right interior


lights

Note

The procedure for renewing the bulbs in the left and right interior
lights is the same and is therefore described for one side only.

Removing:
– Remove interior light ⇒ page 244 .
– Slide out cover -1- in -direction of arrow- from interior light .

7. Lights and switches in roof trim 245


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Remove festoon bulb -1- from interior light .


Bulb for interior light : festoon 12V, C5W
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

7.4 Removing and installing front passenger


side illuminated vanity mirror - W14- and
driver side illuminated vanity mirror -
W20-

7.4.1 Removing and installing front passenger


side illuminated vanity mirror - W14- and
driver side illuminated vanity mirror -
W20-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

♦ When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
tools ( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to
lever out those components using commercially available
tape.
♦ The procedure for removal and installation of both lights is the
same and is therefore described for just one light.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

246 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Carefully lever light out of headliner using removal wedge -


VAS 3409- or suitable screwdriver.

– Release and detach connector -arrow- and remove light.


Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

7.4.2 Renewing bulb for illuminated vanity


mirror
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-

Note

♦ When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
tools ( removal wedge - VAS 3409- , screwdriver) are used to
lever out those components using commercially available
tape.
♦ The procedure for removal and installation of both lights is the
same and is therefore described for just one light.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove illuminated vanity mirror bulb ⇒ page 246 .

7. Lights and switches in roof trim 247


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Press contact plate -1- of light in direction of arrow and remove


festoon bulb -2- from bulb holder.
– Festoon bulb: 12V, C5W
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

248 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

8 Lights and switches in centre console

8.1 Buttons in centre console storage com‐


partment
Depending on the equipment level, the following buttons may be
found in the centre console stowage compartment:
♦ Operating unit in front centre console - E461- (sliding doors)
♦ Electric rear lid button
♦ TCS and ESP button - E256-
♦ Start/stop operation switch - E693-
♦ Park assist steering button - E581-
♦ Parking aid button - E266-
♦ Tyre pressure monitor display button - E492-

Note

The various buttons (depending on equipment level) are installed


as a cluster in a button module and cannot be renewed individu‐
ally.

8.1.1 Removing and installing button module


in centre console stowage compartment
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Detach button module -1- at retainers -arrows- in straight line
upwards from centre console, taking different lengths of con‐
nected wiring into consideration.

– Release and separate all connectors -2- (number will vary de‐
pending on equipment level) and remove button module -1-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

8. Lights and switches in centre console 249


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

8.2 Front passenger side airbag deactiva‐


ted warning lamp - K145-
The front passenger side airbag deactivated warning lamp -
K145- is located in the centre console trim.

8.2.1 Removing and installing front passenger


side airbag deactivated warning lamp -
K145-

WARNING

♦ Danger of triggering of the airbag!


♦ Improper action on airbag unit may result in the triggering
of the airbag!
♦ Observe safety precautions when working on airbag ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Safety
precautions when working on airbag .

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove button module in centre console stowage compart‐
ment ⇒ page 249 .
– Press catches apart in -direction of arrow- and remove front
passenger side airbag deactivated warning lamp - K145- -1-
from trim.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

8.3 Electromechanical parking brake button


and auto-hold button

8.3.1 Removing and installing electrome‐


chanical parking brake button and auto-
hold button
The electromechanical parking brake button - E538- and the auto-
hold button - E540- are integrated in a button module fitted in the
centre console between the front seats.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

250 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Carefully insert feeler gauge (0.6 mm thick) -1-, as shown in


illustration, into gap between centre console -2- and button
module -3-.
– Hold feeler gauge vertically and slide down 10 mm between
button module and centre console.

Note

Vertical insertion of feeler gauge ensures that lock button can be


reached on the outside. At 10 mm insertion depth, the tip of the
feeler gauge can be felt to rest on shoulder of locking button.

– Tilt feeler gauge -1- in -direction of arrow- to operate locking


button -3-. At the same time, lift up rear of button module -2-
from centre console -4-.

– Remove button module -1- upwards from centre console, tak‐


ing different lengths of connected wiring into consideration.

– Pull out primary locking mechanism -1-, push locking button


-2- and pull off connector -3-.
– Remove button module from vehicle.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

8. Lights and switches in centre console 251


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

8.4 AC/DC converter with socket,


12 V-230 V - U13-

WARNING

♦ Capacitors are also located in the housing of the DC/AC


converter with socket, 12 V - 230 V - U13- and these are
charged with a residual voltage.
♦ There is a danger of an electric shock.
♦ The housing of the DC/AC converter with socket, 12 V -
230 V - U13- must never be opened.

8.4.1 Removing and installing DC/AC con‐


verter with socket, 12 V-230 V - U13-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - 3409-

Note

♦ When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
tools ( removal wedge - 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever
out those components using commercially available masking
tape.
♦ The connector, wiring and 230 V socket must never be re‐
paired.
♦ If the connector, wiring, 230 V socket or the AC/DC converter
is defective, the complete unit must be renewed.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers and move ig‐
nition key to position 0 (locked).

252 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Fold down trim -1-.


– Unscrew bolts -2-.

– First, pull trim -1- at bottom towards rear in


-direction of arrow-, and then remove it upwards in
-direction of arrow-.
– Release and disconnect connector.
– Unclip heated rear seat switch with regulator from trim in ve‐
hicles with heated rear seats.

– Release socket at locking lugs -arrows- and remove socket


from trim.

– Detach DC/AC converter with socket, 12 V - 230 V - U13- -1-


from trim, and remove it.
Installing:
Install in reverse order of removal.

8. Lights and switches in centre console 253


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

9 Horn

9.1 Treble horn - H2- and bass horn - H7-

Note

♦ The treble horn - H2- and the bass horn - H7- are actuated in
parallel by the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
♦ The procedure for removal and installation of the treble horn -
H2- and the bass horn - H7- is the same and is therefore
described for just one horn.
♦ The horns can be found on the left and right next to the longi‐
tudinal members.

9.1.1 Removing and installing treble horn -


H2- and bass horn - H7-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 63 ; Front bumper .
– Release connector -1- and disconnect.
– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- and remove signal horn -2- to‐
gether with bracket.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

When installing, position the signal horn so it is not in contact with


adjacent components.

– Tighten securing bolt for bracket on side member to 20 Nm.

254 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

9.1.2 Checking treble horn - H2- and bass


horn - H7-
The horns ( treble horn - H2- and bass horn - H7- ) can be checked
in final control diagnosis by the onboard supply control unit -
J519- .

9. Horn 255
Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

10 Immobiliser

10.1 General description

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011


General description:
The Sharan is equipped with a fourth-generation immobiliser with
online link and download. The main component of the fourth gen‐
eration immobiliser is a central database, in which all of the theft-
relevant data from the participating control units is stored.
Adapting the control units associated with the immobiliser is not
possible without an online link to this database.
Online system test ⇒ page 257 .
♦ A PIN request for the immobiliser components via fax or tem‐
porary access authorisation to the components is not availa‐
ble.
♦ All components associated with the immobiliser must be adap‐
ted online.
♦ All – including re-ordered – vehicle keys are pre-coded to a
specific vehicle in the factory and can only be adapted to this
vehicle.
♦ The relevant chassis number must be specified when re-or‐
dering vehicle keys.
♦ It is no longer possible to adapt components of other brands
for use in Volkswagen vehicles.
Immobiliser components:
♦ Immobiliser control unit - J362- ⇒ page 257
♦ Engine control unit - J623- ⇒ Rep. gr. 23 ; Engine control unit
♦ Ignition key ⇒ page 257
New identity on renewing all components of immobiliser system
⇒ page 257 .
Immobiliser control unit - J362- functions:
♦ Communication between all components associated with the
immobiliser.
♦ Encryption of data between associated control units.
Fault detection and fault display:
The immobiliser is equipped with self-diagnosis, which makes
fault finding easier.
To localise faults, refer to chapter entitled “Vehicle diagnosis,
testing and information system” and use “Guided fault finding”
function.

256 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

10.2 Immobiliser control unit - J362-

10.2.1 Removing and installing immobiliser


control unit - J362-
The immobiliser control unit - J362- is integrated in the dash panel
insert. In the event of control unit failure, the complete dash panel
insert must be renewed ⇒ page 46 .

10.2.2 Adapting immobiliser control unit - J362-


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

10.3 Ignition key

10.3.1 Loss of the ignition key


All – including re-ordered – vehicle keys are pre-coded to a spe‐
cific vehicle in the factory and can only be adapted to this vehicle.
The relevant chassis number must be specified when re-ordering
vehicle keys. The new keys must subsequently be adapted to the
immobiliser control unit - J362- .

Note

Before the lock set or control units can be renewed, the function
“New identity on renewing all components” must be called up
⇒ page 257 .

Adapting ignition key ⇒ page 257

10.3.2 Adapting ignition key

Note

If new or additional ignition keys are required they must be adap‐


ted to the immobiliser control unit.

⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

10.4 New identity on renewing all compo‐


nents
This program performs all the processes required for a recon‐
struction/reinitialisation of all immobiliser components.
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

10.5 Online system test


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

10. Immobiliser 257


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

11 Anti-theft alarm (ATA)

11.1 General description

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011
General description:
The functions of the anti-theft alarm are integrated into the on‐
board supply control unit - J519- .
After renewal of the onboard supply control unit - J519- , the anti-
theft alarm must be adapted ⇒ page 273 .
Fault detection and fault display:
The anti-theft alarm has a self-diagnosis function, which makes
fault finding easier.
For fault finding, use the systems described in chapter “Vehicle
diagnosis, testing and information system” in “Guided Fault Find‐
ing” mode ⇒ page 265 .

11.2 Assembly overview - anti-theft alarm


(ATA)

Note

The components of the anti-theft alarm (ATA) is dependent on the


vehicle equipment.

258 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

1 - Bonnet contact switch -


F266-
❑ In lid lock
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 214
2 - Alarm horn - H12-
❑ In plenum chamber
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 263
3 - Front passenger door con‐
trol unit - J387-
❑ In front passenger door
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ Glazing, window reg‐
ulator; Rep. gr. 64 ; Re‐
moving and installing
window regulator motor
4 - Front passenger door con‐
tact switch - F3-
❑ In front passenger side
central locking lock unit
- F221-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 57 ;
Front door, door compo‐
nents, central locking;
Removing and installing
front door lock
5 - Anti-theft alarm system sen‐
sor - G578-
❑ The anti-theft alarm
sensor - G578- includes
the vehicle inclination
sender - G384- and the
interior monitoring sensor - G273- (two sensors).
❑ in roof console
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 261
6 - Rear right door control unit - J389-
❑ In rear right door
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Glazing, window regulator; Rep. gr. 64 ; Removing and installing window
regulator motor
7 - Rear lid lock unit - F256-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 55 ; Covers, flaps, rear lid; Assembly
overview - locking and unlocking components
8 - Rear left door control unit - J388-
❑ In rear left door
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Glazing, window regulator; Rep. gr. 64 ; Removing and installing window
regulator motor
9 - Central locking SAFELOCK function warning lamp - K133-
❑ In front door trim
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 230
10 - Interior monitoring deactivation switch - E267-
❑ In trim of B-pillar on driver side
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 260

11. Anti-theft alarm (ATA) 259


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

11 - Door contact switch, driver side - F2-


❑ In driver side central locking lock unit - F220-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 57 ; Front door, door components,
central locking; Removing and installing front door lock
12 - Driver door control unit - J386-
❑ In driver door
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Glazing, window regulator; Rep. gr. 64 ; Removing and installing window
regulator motor
13 - Onboard supply control unit - J519-
❑ In driver footwell under dash panel
❑ Includes central locking and anti-theft alarm system aerial - R47- ⇒ page 263
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 273

11.3 Activating and deactivating anti-theft


alarm
Activating anti-theft alarm:
The anti-theft alarm is switched on automatically when the vehicle
is locked. The anti-theft alarm is then immediately primed.

Note

To stop the anti-theft alarm system triggering an alarm unneces‐


sarily, close all windows and doors before locking vehicle.

Deactivating anti-theft alarm:


♦ The anti-theft alarm is deactivated on unlocking the vehicle
with the remote control unlocking button or
♦ when the ignition is switched on.
Unlock the vehicle mechanically (emergency open)
– Unlock the driver door.
The anti-theft alarm system remains active, although no alarm is
triggered.
– Switch on ignition within 15 seconds.

Note

If you do not switch on the ignition, the alarm will trigger after 15
seconds.

When the ignition is switched on, the electronic immobiliser de‐


tects a valid vehicle key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm.

11.4 Interior monitoring deactivation switch -


E267- and deactivation button for vehi‐
cle inclination sender - E360-
The interior monitoring deactivation switch - E267- and the deac‐
tivation button for vehicle inclination sender - E360- are assem‐
bled as one component and located in the B-pillar on the driver
side.

260 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

11.4.1 Removing and installing interior moni‐


toring deactivation switch - E267- and
deactivation button for vehicle inclina‐
tion sender - E360-
Removing and installing interior monitoring deactivation switch -
E267- and deactivation button for vehicle inclination sender -
E360- ⇒ page 212

11.5 Anti-theft alarm sensor - G578-

Note

♦ The anti-theft alarm sensor - G578- includes the vehicle incli‐


nation sender - G384- and the interior monitoring sensor -
G273- (3 sensors).
♦ The anti-theft alarm sensor - G578- cannot be dismantled and
must be replaced as one component.

Removing and installing anti-theft alarm sensor - G578-


⇒ page 261

11.5.1 Removing and installing anti-theft alarm


sensor - G578-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - 3409-

Note

♦ When removing and installing components that are in view


(switches, covers, trim and so on), mask off areas in which
tools ( removal wedge - 3409- , screwdriver) are used to lever
out those components using commercially available tape.
♦ The following illustrations show removal and installation of the
anti-theft alarm sensor - G578- on a vehicle with sliding/tilting
sunroof. Removal and installation of anti-theft alarm sensor -
G578- on vehicles without sliding/tilting sunroof are carried out
in the same way.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front interior light ⇒ page 240

11. Anti-theft alarm (ATA) 261


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release the three locking lugs -arrows- and remove anti-theft


alarm sensor - G578- -1- from interior light, taking connected
wiring length into consideration.

– Unclip wires from brackets -1-.


– Release fasteners -arrows- and pull out both receivers -2- and
interior monitoring sender -3- from interior light.
– Take anti-theft alarm sensor - G578- out of vehicle.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

♦ To prevent malfunction of the anti-theft alarm sensor, both


sensors and the interior monitor receiver must be installed in
their correct location in the interior light.
♦ The sensors which are wired to the control unit as a pair, are
the senders and these must be engaged into the outer mount‐
ings of the interior light.
♦ The single sensor is the receiver, and it must be installed into
the middle mounting of the interior light.

11.6 Vehicle inclination sender - G384-

Note

♦ The anti-theft alarm sensor - G578- includes the vehicle incli‐


nation sender - G384- and the interior monitoring sensor -
G273- (3 sensors).
♦ The anti-theft alarm sensor - G578- cannot be dismantled and
must be replaced as one component.

Removing and installing anti-theft alarm sensor - G578-


⇒ page 261

11.7 Interior monitoring sensor - G273-

Note

♦ The anti-theft alarm sensor - G578- includes the vehicle incli‐


nation sender - G384- and the interior monitoring sensor -
G273- (3 sensors).
♦ The anti-theft alarm sensor - G578- cannot be dismantled and
must be replaced as one component.

262 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Removing and installing anti-theft alarm sensor - G578-


⇒ page 261

11.8 Central locking and anti-theft alarm sys‐


tem aerial - R47-

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Operating manual
The central locking and anti-theft alarm system aerial - R47- re‐
ceives the signals from the remote control and passes them to
the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
The central locking and anti-theft alarm system aerial - R47- is
integrated into the onboard supply control unit - J519- and cannot
be renewed individually.

11.9 Alarm horn - H12-


The alarm horn - H12- is located centrally in the plenum chamber.

11.9.1 Removing and installing alarm horn -


H12-

Note

The anti-theft alarm must be deactivated ⇒ page 260 before re‐


moving the alarm horn.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove plenum chamber cover ⇒ General body repairs, ex‐
terior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Plenum chamber cover .
– Unscrew securing nut -arrow- and remove alarm horn - H12-
-1- from bracket, taking account of different lengths of con‐
nected wiring.
– Release and separate connector -2- and remove alarm horn -
H12- -1- from vehicle.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Tighten M8 nut that secures alarm horn to bracket to 20 Nm.

11.9.2 Checking alarm horn - H12-


The alarm horn - H12- can be checked using final control diag‐
nosis for onboard supply control unit - J519- .

11.10 Adaptations of anti-theft alarm


The following functions of the anti-theft alarm system can be
adapted:
♦ Adapting sensitivity of interior monitoring system

11. Anti-theft alarm (ATA) 263


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Adapting sensitivity of inclination sensor


♦ Adapting alarm delay on opening driver door
♦ Adapting country setting for intelligent alarm horn
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

264 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

97 – Wiring
1 Vehicle diagnosis, testing and infor‐
mation systems
⇒ Electrical System, General Information; Rep. gr. 27 ; Vehicle
diagnostic, testing and information systems .

1. Vehicle diagnosis, testing and information systems 265


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2 Fuse holder

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

2.1 Fuse holder in dash panel

2.1.1 Removing and installing fuse holder in


dash panel
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1410-

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove trim in driver's footwell ⇒ General body repairs, in‐
terior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Trim; Removing and installing left trim on
driver side .
– Undo bolts -arrows- and pull fuse holder -1- downwards off
retainer.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– Tighten securing bolts to specified torque of 4 Nm.

266 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

2.2 Fuse holder in electronics box

2.2.1 Removing and installing electronics box


in dash panel
Removing and installing fuse box in electronics box is explained
in the course of the description “Removing and installing elec‐
tronics box on the left in engine compartment” ⇒ page 269 .

2. Fuse holder 267


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

3 Relay carriers

3.1 Relay carrier on left of dash panel

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

3.1.1 Removing and installing relay carrier on


left of dash panel
Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Remove knee airbag ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag
– Remove fuse holder ⇒ page 266 .
– Remove onboard supply control unit ⇒ page 273 .
– Remove dash panel insert ⇒ page 45 .
– Remove park assist steering control unit - J791- ⇒ page 191 .
– Remove loudspeaker for parking aid - R169- ⇒ page 186 .
– Unscrew both securing nuts -arrows- and lower relay carrier
-1- downwards.
– Pull off relays and fuses (number will vary depending on equip‐
ment level) and remove relay carrier downwards.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– Tighten securing nuts to 4.5 Nm.

268 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

4 Electronics boxes

4.1 Electronics box on left side of engine


compartment (engine compartment
electronics box)

4.1.1 Removing and installing electronics box


on left side of engine compartment (en‐
gine compartment electronics box)

Caution

When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐


dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .

Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .
– Push safety clip -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove cover
from electronics box -2- upwards.

Caution

♦ Electrical components that are protected by the multiple


fuse may fail, e.g. the electromechanical power steering!
♦ The multiple fuse will be damaged when the hexagon nuts
of wire connections are loosened!
♦ Renew the multiple fuse after loosening any connection!

– Unscrew hexagon nuts -1-.


– Open cable guide covers of electronics box -3- in
-direction of arrow-.
– Remove wires from connecting bolts.
– Unclip wiring from wiring guides.
– Renew multiple fuse -2- after loosening hexagon nuts -1-.

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

4. Electronics boxes 269


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Unscrew central bolt -arrow- of electronics box -1-.

Note

When the central bolt -arrow- is removed, the electronics box


-1- is pushed upwards off the electronics box bracket.

– Pull electronics box -1- upwards off bracket of electronics box.

Note

To remove the flat contact housing -1-, the air filter housing (on
vehicles with diesel engine only), the battery and the battery con‐
sole must first be removed.

– If necessary, remove air filter housing.


– Remove battery ⇒ page 4 .

– Undo and remove bolts -arrows- of battery console -1-.


– Remove battery console -1- from vehicle.

270 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Push apart tabs on bracket of electronics box -arrows B- and


slide out flat contact housing -1- sideways -arrow A- from
bracket of electronics box.
– Push apart tabs on bracket of electronics box -arrows C- and
slide out flat contact housing -2- forwards -arrow D- from
bracket of electronics box.

– Remove securing nuts -arrows- from bracket of electronics


box -1-.

Note

The installation of an additional relay carrier depends entirely on


the vehicle equipment.

– Pull bracket of electronics box -1- upwards off studs, taking


connected wiring length into consideration.

– Unclip additional relay carrier -1- sideways out of bracket of


electronics box -2-.
– Remove electronics box -2-retainer from vehicle.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– Tighten securing bolts or securing nuts to specified torque
settings.

Caution

♦ Electrical components that are protected by the multiple


fuse may fail, e.g. the electromechanical power steering!
♦ The multiple fuse will be damaged when the hexagon nuts
of wire connections are loosened!
♦ Renew the multiple fuse after loosening any connection!

4. Electronics boxes 271


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Specified torques: electronics box on left side of engine compart‐


ment
Threaded connections Torque settings
Securing nuts -1- M5 (8 mm) 4 Nm
Securing nuts -1- M6 (10 mm) 6 Nm
Electronics box central 9 Nm
bolt

– Slide cover -2- on electronics box and push safety clip -1- in
-direction of arrow- until cover -2- engages.

Note

Then check whether the cover -2- of the electronics box is en‐
gaged correctly.

272 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

5 Select Control units

5.1 On-board supply control unit - J519-

5.1.1 General description

Note

♦ If the onboard supply control unit - J519- is to be renewed, the


procedure “coding onboard supply control unit” ⇒ page 275
must always be carried out for reading the codes stored in the
control unit.
♦ After renewing the onboard supply control unit - J519- and
depending on equipment, the other functions of the onboard
supply control unit, such as “immobiliser”, “anti-theft alarm”,
“entry and start authorisation”, “tyre pressure monitor” and the
central locking system keys must also be adapted.
♦ Start by adapting the immobiliser ( ⇒ page 256 ) and continue,
in any sequence, with the further functions of the onboard
supply control unit - J519- .
♦ Additional information:

⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011


⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
⇒ Operating manual
General description:
The onboard supply control unit - J519- controls the following
functions in the vehicle:
♦ Electrical load management
♦ Exterior light control
♦ Turn signal control
♦ Wipe/wash, windscreen and rear window
♦ Headlight washer system
♦ Rain and light sensor
♦ Heated windscreen and rear window
♦ Interior light control
♦ Terminal control
♦ Dimmers, instrument lighting
♦ Footwell light
♦ Fuel pump supply
♦ Alternator stand-by
♦ Horn
♦ Hazard warning light
♦ Release control
♦ Control of the central locking system

5. Select Control units 273


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

♦ Actuation of the front and rear door control units


♦ Activation of the rear lid unlocking function
♦ Activation of the fuel filler flap unlocking function
♦ Activation of the anti-theft alarm (ATA)
♦ Activation of the immobiliser
The following functions can be adapted via ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic
tester, Guided fault finding :
♦ Adapting acoustic feedback when unlocking
♦ Adapting acoustic feedback when locking
♦ Adapting turn signal cycles for lane change flash
♦ Adapting automatic unlocking on removing ignition key
♦ Adapting automatic locking at 15 km/h
♦ Adapting battery monitoring system sounder
♦ Adapting confirmation of convenience closing
♦ Adapting coming home time
♦ Adapting leaving home time
♦ Adapting ATA delay on opening driver door
♦ Adapting unlocking of individual doors
♦ Adapting sensitivity of interior monitoring system
♦ Adapting sensitivity of inclination sensor
♦ Deactivating factory mode
♦ Adapting footwell lighting dimmer value
♦ Adapting convenience operation via remote control
♦ Adapting country setting for intelligent alarm horn
♦ Adapting visual feedback when locking
♦ Adapting remote control unit key
♦ Onboard supply control unit final control diagnosis

Note

It depends on the fitted equipment options as to whether the


above mentioned adaptions can be carried out.

Fault detection and fault display:


The onboard supply control unit - J519- is equipped with self-di‐
agnosis, which makes fault finding easier.
For fault finding, use the systems described in chapter “Vehicle
diagnosis, testing and information system” in “Guided Fault Find‐
ing” mode ⇒ page 265 .

5.1.2 Removing and installing onboard supply


control unit - J519-
The onboard supply control unit - J519- is located beneath the
relay carrier, in the driver's side footwell.

274 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

Note

♦ If the onboard supply control unit - J519- is to be renewed, the


procedure “coding onboard supply control unit” ⇒ page 275
must always be carried out for reading the codes stored in the
control unit.
♦ The following illustrations show removal on a LHD vehicle.
Removal and installation of onboard supply control unit on an
RHD vehicle are performed using the corresponding mirror-
image procedure.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trims; Removing and
installing steering column trim .
– Remove trim in driver's footwell ⇒ General body repairs, in‐
terior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Trim; Removing and installing left trim on
driver side .
– Remove knee airbag ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag
– Remove fuse holder ⇒ page 266 .
– Release and separate three connectors.
– Press both catches -arrows- and swing onboard supply control
unit downwards slightly.
– Pull onboard supply control unit downwards and remove from
holder against direction of normal travel.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:
– When installing, insert onboard supply control unit - J519- into
bracket on rear side first and then push upwards until it en‐
gages audibly in the bracket.

5.1.3 Coding onboard supply control unit -


J519-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

5.1.4 Onboard supply control unit - J519- final


control diagnosis
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

5. Select Control units 275


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

5.2 Driver door control unit - J386-

Note

♦ The driver door control unit - J386- and the driver side window
regulator motor - V147- are contained in one unit and cannot
be replaced individually.
♦ If the driver door control unit - J386- or the driver side window
regulator motor - V147- are replaced, then the work procedure
“Coding driver door control unit” must be subsequently per‐
formed ⇒ page 276 .
♦ Additional information:

⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011


⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
⇒ Operating manual

5.2.1 Removing and installing driver door con‐


trol unit - J386-
Removing and installing driver door control unit - J386- ⇒ General
body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 64 ; Front door window; Removing
and installing window regulator motor .

Note

If the driver door control unit - J386- or the driver side window
regulator motor - V147- are replaced, then the work procedure
“Coding driver door control unit” must be subsequently performed
⇒ page 276 .

5.2.2 Coding driver door control unit - J386-


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

5.3 Front passenger door control unit -


J387-

Note

♦ The front passenger door control unit - J387- and the front
passenger side window regulator motor - V148- are contained
in one unit and cannot be replaced individually.
♦ If the front passenger door control unit - J387- or the front
passenger side window regulator motor - V148- are replaced,
then the work procedure “Coding front passenger door control
unit” must be subsequently performed ⇒ page 277 .
♦ Additional information:

⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011


⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
⇒ Operating manual

276 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

5.3.1 Removing and installing front passenger


door control unit - J387-
Removing and installing front passenger door control unit - J387-
⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 64 ; Front door window;
Removing and installing window regulator motor .

Note

If the front passenger door control unit - J387- or the front pas‐
senger side window regulator motor - V148- are replaced, then
the work procedure “Coding front passenger door control unit”
must be subsequently performed ⇒ page 277 .

5.3.2 Coding front passenger door control unit


- J387-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

5.4 Rear left door control unit - J388-

Note

♦ The rear left door control unit - J388- and the rear left window
regulator motor - V26- are contained in one unit and cannot
be replaced individually.
♦ If the rear left door control unit - J388- or the rear left window
regulator motor - V26- are replaced, then the work procedure
“Coding rear left door control unit” must be subsequently per‐
formed ⇒ page 277 .
♦ Additional information:

⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011


⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
⇒ Operating manual

5.4.1 Removing and installing rear left door


control unit - J388-
Removing and installing rear left door control unit - J388- ⇒ Gen‐
eral body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 64 ; Rear door window;
Removing and installing window regulator motor .

Note

If the rear left door control unit - J388- or the rear left window
regulator motor - V26- are replaced, then the work procedure
“Coding rear left door control unit” must be subsequently per‐
formed ⇒ page 277 .

5.4.2 Coding rear left door control unit - J388-


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

5. Select Control units 277


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

5.5 Rear right door control unit - J389-

Note

♦ The rear right door control unit - J389- and the rear right win‐
dow regulator motor - V27- are contained in one unit and
cannot be replaced individually.
♦ If the rear right door control unit - J389- or the rear right window
regulator motor - V27- are replaced, then the work procedure
“Coding rear right door control unit” must be subsequently
performed ⇒ page 278 .
♦ Additional information:

⇒ Self-study programme No. 445 ; The Sharan 2011


⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
⇒ Operating manual

5.5.1 Removing and installing rear right door


control unit - J389-
Removing and installing rear right door control unit - J389- ⇒
General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 64 ; Rear door window;
Removing and installing window regulator motor .

Note

If the rear right door control unit - J389- or the rear right window
regulator motor - V27- are replaced, then the work procedure
“Coding rear right door control unit” must be subsequently per‐
formed ⇒ page 278 .

5.5.2 Coding rear right door control unit -


J389-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

5.6 Trailer detector control unit - J345-


The trailer detector control unit - J345- is located behind the left
side panel trim in the luggage compartment.

Note

Additional information:

⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐


tions
⇒ Operating manual
General description:
The trailer detector control unit - J345- detects from a power draw
of minimum 5 W1) the “trailer operation” and transmits this infor‐
mation to various control units via the CAN data bus.

278 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

The trailer detector control unit - J345- is supplied with information


(light control) from the onboard supply control unit - J519- via the
CAN data bus.
1) “Trailer operation” can only be detected if at least turn signal indicators or side
marker lights are switched on.

Fault detection and fault display:


The trailer detector control unit - J345- features self-diagnosis to
facilitate fault finding.
For fault finding, use the systems described in chapter “Vehicle
diagnosis, testing and information system” in “Guided Fault Find‐
ing” mode ⇒ page 265 .

Note

For checking control unit, use socket tester - V.A.G 1537/A- or


trailer socket tester - VAS 5800- .

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Trailer socket tester - VAS 5800-

♦ Socket tester - V.A.G 1537/A-

5.6.1 Removing and installing trailer detector


control unit - J345-
The trailer detector control unit - J345- is located behind the left
side panel trim in the luggage compartment.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove left luggage compartment trim ⇒ General body re‐
pairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Luggage/load compartment trims .

5. Select Control units 279


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

– Release lock button -arrow- and remove trailer detector con‐


trol unit - J345- -2- downwards out of bracket -3-, taking
lengths of connected wires into consideration.
– Release and separate connectors -1- and remove trailer de‐
tector control unit - J345- -2-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐
serve the following:

Note

Following installation, a new trailer detector control unit - J345-


must be encoded ⇒ page 280 .

5.6.2 Coding trailer detector control unit -


J345-
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

5.6.3 Actuator diagnosis for bulbs


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

5.6.4 Actuator diagnosis for folding tow hitch


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

280 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Sharan 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 11.2018

6 Wiring harness and connector re‐


pairs
⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Wiring
harness and connector repairs

6. Wiring harness and connector repairs 281

You might also like